JP7096519B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In the spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), one game is started when the game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the rotating cylinders (reel) in multiple rows and stopping the rotating cylinders by making full use of the rotating cylinder stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotating operation, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the effective line. When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special gaming state in which the player is in a higher profit state than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small winning combination is higher than in the normal game state). ) Is generally the type that shifts to. Here, in the rotating cylinder type game machine, when an image or the like for directing to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel. When operating the rotating cylinder stop device, etc., it is configured to predict and enjoy the result of the game while comparing the design displayed on the rotating cylinder with the image for staging displayed on the display. There are many things that are done. In addition, many of them are configured so that if some abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may occur in which the progress of the gaming is stopped. Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit ( The mainstream is a pachinko machine that can shift to a special game) state and open the large prize opening provided on the game board to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, a time-reduced gaming state that increases the efficiency of probability fluctuation gaming states that increase the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and symbol fluctuations for notifying the lottery results in the jackpot lottery. There are also gaming machines that enhance the interest of the game by creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous to the player according to these gaming states.

JP-A-2017-042352 JP-A-2014-0794919 JP 2016-198243

It is desired to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly proceeding with a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment has a gaming machine housing having an open front surface, a front door which is connected to the left side of the gaming machine housing via a hinge mechanism in front view and can be opened and closed, a 1-bet lamp, and 2 Bet lamp, 3-bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, start switch, multiple reels, on state that allows acceptance of game media, and off state that does not allow acceptance of game media. A blocker to obtain, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means are provided so that a power cutoff process can be executed after a power outage occurs, and the reel control means is for accelerating a specific reel. The acceleration process is configured to be able to be executed over a predetermined period, and if the power cutoff process is executed during the predetermined period during which the acceleration process is being executed and then the power is restored, the predetermined period is specified. The acceleration process for accelerating the specific reel can be continuously executed in the remaining period of the period, and the inside of the gaming machine housing includes a reel unit including the plurality of reels. A main tank member for storing the game medium and an auxiliary tank member for storing the game medium overflowing from the main tank member are provided, and a part of the main tank member is from the main tank member. A slope portion that descends toward the auxiliary tank member is provided, the reel unit has a plurality of screw holes, and at least two or more of the plurality of screw holes have conductivity. Among the locking parts inserted through the plurality of screw holes, the stopping parts are inserted, and the auxiliary tank is vertically below the predetermined locking parts on the rightmost side in the front view of the gaming machine housing. A member is arranged, and among the locking parts inserted through the plurality of screw holes, the slope portion is arranged vertically below a specific locking part different from the predetermined locking part. In a state where the auxiliary tank member is installed inside the game machine housing, the first member and the second member for detecting whether or not the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full. The distance between the first member and the second member is longer than the length of the predetermined locking component in the longitudinal direction, and the auxiliary tank member is the game. In a state of being installed inside the machine housing, it has at least the first member and the second member for detecting whether or not the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full. , The first member and the front The distance between the second member and the second member is configured to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the specific locking component, and the reel control means is a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means. The player is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation of the player, is in the predetermined gaming state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, each reel stopped due to the reception of a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the player's final stop operation thereafter. After the stop operation is received for the corresponding predetermined reel at the first timing and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, the player can be provided with the number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Each reel that has been stopped due to the acceptance of a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. Although each of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, the stop operation is accepted for the predetermined reel at the first timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even under a predetermined situation in which the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped when the plurality of reels are stopped, the player is configured to be able to provide the player with a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. In the next game of the predetermined game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the number of bets is set to 3, and the acceptance of the game medium is permitted. In the specific game executed by the operation of the start switch, in the predetermined game state, the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of reels are rotating. The replay lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp is on, the 2-bet lamp is on, the 3-bet lamp is on, the start lamp is off, and then the At the second timing after the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped, the replay lamp is turned off, the 1-bet lamp is lit, and the 2-bet lamp is lit. , The 3-bet lamp is lit, and the starter The lamp is turned off, and then, at the fourth timing after the replay lamp is turned on at the third timing, the start lamp is turned on, the replay lamp is turned on, and the specificity is specified. In the game, the replay lamp is turned on at the third timing after the specific symbol combination is stopped, and in the game executed thereafter (the next game of the specific game), the internal lottery means. The replay lamp is lit at the second timing after the specific result is determined and then the specific symbol combination is stopped, and then at the fourth timing, the replay is turned on. The lamp is lit, and at least from the third timing after the specific symbol combination in the specific game is stopped, after the specific symbol combination in the next game of the specific game is stopped. Until the fourth timing, the replay lamp is lit without being turned off, the blocker is in the off state at the second timing in the specific game, and the blocker is in the on state at the fourth timing. It is an aspect characterized by being.
Further, the gaming machine according to this embodiment has a strip-shaped reel tape (for example, a reel strip MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (for example, a reel frame MW), and the reel tape has a length of the reel tape. A plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the direction, and the symbol types include at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol), and the first symbol. The maximum width value of one symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol, and the second symbol is arranged at at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. The first symbol is not arranged at each of both ends of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction, and the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is from the outer periphery of the surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound. May be an embodiment characterized by a long reel.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly advancing the game.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus appearance rate in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of an execution process for adding the number of games on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram relating to the rotation operation of the reel in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a push order display in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a sub-side power supply cutoff process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the effect-related determination process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution enablement determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the AT-during effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a revival-possibility effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the process during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the internal processing of the BB, which is advantageous when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop-time effect-related determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an action diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an action diagram in a winning game of re-gaming applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an action diagram in a winning game of re-gaming applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 63 is an action diagram in a winning game of re-gaming applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a side sectional view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the arrangement of the medal auxiliary tank HS and the fullness detection electrode DE. It is a schematic diagram which shows the size and position of a fullness detection electrode and a screw BS. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a rotating game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, as a random number). Is a hard random number, a built-in random number generated by the main control chip including the CPU, and a soft random number as a pseudo-random number). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, re-game roles) for shifting to special games, etc. Can be mentioned. The term "CPU" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. "Power outage" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine is below a certain level regardless of whether or not the power switch provided in the gaming machine is operated. For example, power supply It also includes the interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is "1" if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied to physically hold information (for example, "1" for conduction. If the element configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the industry and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is given, it is "1" if it is stored, and if it is not stored. It is set to "0". It should be noted that it is generally configured to supply backup power to a part or all of the data held in the RAM at the time of power failure). The "game state" corresponds to, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (a so-called big hit game, which is called a bonus game, a first-class BB, a second-class BB, or the like. ), The winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value. Examples include the reel stop order for winning a medal, an AT (assist time) state in which a stop position can be notified, and an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. Further, even in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, the AT in progress state, and the ART in progress state is different, the high probability normal game state, the low probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, it is referred to as the lottery state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery for shifting to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the AT-related state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the AT-related state is referred to as "normal gaming state". Collectively, the state related to ART may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or the like as a state related to ART. The "winning combination" is the type (or condition device number) of the conditional device won by the internal lottery. The "notification state" is a state related to an AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even if the game is won by a conditional device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to AT is a state in which push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as "the number of playable notification games", and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of playable notification games" is 1 or more (the game in which "0" is set may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the "number of playable notification games", the difference in the number of game media obtained based on the winning of the small winning combination (mainly the pushing order bell role) (the number of payouts minus the input number) and the number of pushes. The number of times the winning bell role is won may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and in this example, it is referred to as an "additional specialization state". Further, the "specific condition" is a condition in which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and the specific condition is, for example, that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is determined in advance. It operates when it is played, and the operation can be continued until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times, and it is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). The "first-class special bonus continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special bonus, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated, and it may be called BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Type 2 special bonus" is a bonus that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning combination, and it operates when it is determined in advance, and the result of one game can be obtained. In that case, the operation is terminated, and it may be called CB (challenge bonus). The "type 2 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 2 special accessory, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the meantime, and it may be called MB (middle bonus) or type 2 BB. The "ordinary bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is a specific symbol. It operates when the combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and may be referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when a first-class BB combination is won, it is regarded as JACIN, and the first-class BB is always in RB during execution. Further, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. Further, the "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state in which the pull-in control that can be executed after the stop operation is performed is not executed, and the reel is stopped at the nearest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position in which the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel of. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which CB is always in progress when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described.

(The present embodiment) Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front side of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a substrate), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPU MC is mounted) and a sub control board S (a board on which a sub control chip SC including a CPU SC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU> The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the gaming state visible, a mechanism for enabling input of a game medium, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visible, the reel window D160, the input number indicator light D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, and the number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of the game medium and the input of the number of bets (number of bets), the medal insertion slot D170, the bet button D220, and the mechanism for allowing the inserted game medium to be paid out are settled. Button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as a mechanism for operating the reel. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine in the present embodiment is a player to which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. are attached. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the gaming state visible> Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. Further, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting the game medals necessary for starting one game) are lit. It is configured as. Specifically, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In that case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and if there are two game medals bet, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, and the 2-bet lamp D212 : Lights up, 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and when there are 3 game medals bet, 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, 2-bet lamp D212: lights up, and 3-bet lamp D213: lights up (re-game). This is not the case in the next game where is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of LEDs, and the operation of the start lever D50 is effective (the operation of the start lever D50 is effective ().
It is configured to turn on when the operation is accepted) and to turn off when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (the operation is not accepted). Further, the re-game lamp D290 is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game when the re-game is stopped and displayed is completed. Further, the insertable lamp D300 lights up (may be blinking) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is performed. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. It should be noted that the special game status display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the total number of payouts may be made by the effect display device S40 (also referred to as the second information display unit) described later. By configuring to display, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the game machine as medals possessed by the player. Further, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). The winning combination may differ depending on the stop order of D43) {so-called push order combination (sometimes referred to as a push order combination), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed as stopped is different Is generally configured so that the profit margin (number of payouts, RT state after that, etc.) given to the player can be different}, which is the most advantageous reel for the player in the game. It is configured to notify the stop order (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player. Therefore, the display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to AT that is advantageous for the player (in this example, a push order navigation state, which may also be referred to as a notification game, details will be described later), which is guaranteed when the game progresses. It is configured as. It should be noted that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the player may be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games whose state regarding the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly game machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a payout number display device and a push order display device.

Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when it is an "advantageous section" and turned off when it is not an "advantageous section" (for lighting and extinguishing timing). Will be described later). Here, in the revolving gaming machine according to this example, as in the conventional revolving gaming machine, it is easy to obtain a game medal, which is an advantageous special gaming state for the player (so-called big hit game, bonus game). , 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replaying combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the replaying combination is a predetermined value. The re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state), the stop order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and the RT state and the AT state are A combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "game states", any one of the three "game sections" of "normal section", "waiting section" and "advantageous section". Can be set. In this example, the "waiting section" is not set, but one of the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" is set. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "game sections", for example, the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section display YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also the setting control of the "game state". Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the progress of the game is relatively advantageous to the player depending on the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It is possible to convey to the player without telling a lie. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, but in that case, it remains. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set "game section" also affects the transition to the "game state". It can be given, and as a result, it is possible to automatically suppress the significant increase in gambling due to the "game state" such as the AT state or the ART state, which has a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As described above, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the end condition of the "advantageous section" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example is that the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts can be obtained among the small winning combination that constitutes the "pushing order combination (combination with pushing order)". Sequential navigation One execution (for example, if there are 7 cards, 3 cards, and 1 small game as the small game that constitutes the push order game, the 7 cards with the largest number of payouts can be obtained. If there is a push order combination that can acquire 7 or 1 cards depending on the push order and a push order role that can acquire 3 cards depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can acquire 3 cards is referred to here. (Not applicable to push order navigation) "or" Winning any of BB, RB, MB ", and" Arbitrary end condition (40G 1 set loop lottery non-winning (AT), fixed 32G The end condition is to satisfy "Progress (precursor), etc.)" or "Advantageous section 1500G". In the case of a specification that does not have a push order bell combination (example: there is a push order for replay to shift the RT state, but there is no small combination with a different number of payouts depending on the push order). The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigation that can acquire the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination corresponding to the 11-card winning combination and the small winning combination corresponding to the 1-card winning combination are configured as the small winning combination constituting the push order combination, so that "the number of payouts is the largest". "Execution of push order navigation once that can win small wins" means to notify the push order in which 11 medals can be won (11 wins can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media> Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling input of game media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting medals, and the game medals inserted in the slot are guided to the inside of the gaming machine under the condition that medals can be accepted. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and are guided to the inside of the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medals (credit medals) and / or the bet medals can be refunded to the player by the operation. There is. The game medals refunded by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for Operating the Reel Unit> Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operations can be sequentially stopped by operating each stop button. Has been done.

<Other Mechanisms Provided in the Front Door DU> Next, regarding the main parts of the other mechanisms provided in the front door DU, the front door DU of FIG. 2 was opened to show the internal configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine P. The explanation will be given with reference to a perspective view. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be turned on in various lighting modes as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game. (Illustrated), a door substrate D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a middle panel (intermediate decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , Upper panel D130, lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the front door DU so that the display unit for displaying the effect or the like can be visually recognized through the fluoroscopic region formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamps are on the right side and the left side of the lower panel D140. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side of the upper panel D130. Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and input signals such as the above-mentioned stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60 are attached to the door board D. Is input, and has the function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M described later. Further, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU to detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and to simplify the detection. It has a function of performing proper authenticity, guiding the proper medal to the hopper H40 described later, and returning the inappropriate medal to the medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right below the door substrate D. The middle panel is an upper part of the operation console and a lower part of the upper panel D130, and is a panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB2 attached to the above-mentioned operation console D190 are an operation on the menu screen described later and a button repeated striking effect on the sub-control board S side (continuous striking operation of the sub-input button SB). It is a member used for the progress of a mini-game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the "AT in progress") or the like (for example, an effect relating to whether or not a bonus has been won). The front door DU of the spinning machine P can detect the open / closed state of the medal tray D230 for receiving the game medal (or simply called a medal) released from the discharge port D240, and the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. There is. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is lit (or blinks). ), It is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided in each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player indicates that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on the presence / absence (or blinking) of the stop button lamp S60 and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived by. Since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the effective stop button D40 is configured to light in the lighting color corresponding to the effective stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop is stopped. As the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 are configured to be different from each other. Further, by differentiating the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (may be different such as lighting / blinking or low-speed blinking / high-speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button that should be stopped at present. For example, all the reels are rotating, and the pressing order of "left → middle → right" is correct (the correct answer). When the push order bell that is the maximum number of payouts is won, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button are stopped. When the button lamp is turned on in blue and then the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is supported. The stop button lamp may be configured to blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a substrate) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized via the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel portion (on the reel band MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button on the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is configured to enable the rotation operation and the stop operation of the respective reel portions. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on, the outer periphery of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that the outer periphery of the reel portion can be visually recognized as if it is lit by the light transmitted through the reel. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating cylinder board K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

Further, above the reel M50, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored, which controls various effects performed by using the above. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. The button M30 is connected. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided at appropriate positions such as on the main control board M (that is, the front door DU is opened). If not, it may be installed in a position where artificial access is difficult).

Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are paid out from the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, on the front surface of the power supply board E (which may also be referred to as a power supply unit E), a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is also provided. The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS> Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating drum type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s that serves as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 near the door board D, and a game medal ejection port D240 is provided below the insertion reception sensor D10s. A coin shooter D90 or the like is provided to guide the user. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only the game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that this function does not conform. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been awarded are configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. If a game medal is inserted before the player operates the start lever D50 (when the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medals are selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only those that satisfy the standard are satisfied. The medals that have been inserted into the hopper H40 and do not meet the standards are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when the game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the inserted game medal is inserted regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (in the back of the flow path), a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided, and when a game medal that meets the dimensional standards and is accepted passes, the first insertion sensor D20s And, it is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to the medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The input reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it is turned on by pressing the two protruding mechanisms, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. .. Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard and has a diameter smaller than that of the game medal, for example) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed. Not done. Since the medal cannot maintain the standing state, such a medal cannot pass through the passage (the medal collapses) and is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine an error (as a result, the blocker D100 may be turned off) even when the ON time is continuous for a predetermined time or longer. ..

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s immediately after passing. This input sensor (first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at intervals smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured in.

<Medal payout device H> Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and the top view of the medal payout device H of FIG. The medal payout device H is operated by the settlement button in a state where credits (game medals electronically stored inside the game machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start the game) are present. It will be activated when the game medal is paid out by winning or winning. When operating, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven, so that the disk H50 rotates about the disk rotation shaft H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on / off status of each sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s on / off). It is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the transition order of the off combination, etc.) and the on / off time. More specifically, for example, when the game medal exit H60 is normally passed, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the release urging means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = on → 1st payout Since the sensor state transition is sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off, if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , It can be exemplified to configure it to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a specified number (maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20. The effective line for which the winning is determined is one of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is one (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)->bonus". For example, when the replaying role and the bonus are established at the same time. , The symbol combination that becomes the re-game role is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. In addition, when the bell and watermelon are established, if the stop button is pressed at the position where both can be retracted (the position within 4 frames to the stop position where the prize is won), priority is given to the small winning combination with a large number of payouts. It is configured to pull in. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to one line, left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 upper stage). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small combination that gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small combination with a large number of payouts when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is controlled to pull in with priority (number of sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is possible (within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning among the (arranged) symbols (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames (0th to 19th), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, the "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including the "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the type of symbol is increased / decreased / changed.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, any of them will occur. The combination of symbols is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of watermelon, in the middle row). It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as aligning in a horizontal straight line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols serving as a type 1 BB combination (a so-called type 1 special accessory continuous operation device, but hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a BB combination) is used. Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is operated continuously and ends with a payout of more than 264 sheets) "Sheep / Sheep / Sheep" and Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is operated continuously to end 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" that will end with a payout that exceeds) and "White Seven / White Seven / End with a payout of more than 132 cards by continuously operating RB-B). It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In addition, in this embodiment, when the first type BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. It is configured to draw a winning combination (small combination, replaying combination) other than the winning combination by referring to the lottery table (a method in which the table referred to during the combination lottery is not switched during the execution of one BB). (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the table referred to at the time of the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th replays 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state, refer to the details of the RT state. Will be described later). Since "RT0" is in an RT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as a fall. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and the number 18 is displayed. When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, and the reels are 21st to 27th. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Winning 01" to "Winning 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a pushing order different from the pushing order that is most advantageous for the player. , The symbol combinations of "Prize 08" to "Prize 11" corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices according to this embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the present embodiment, the re-game combinations are provided from re-game-A to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and are in the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Depending on the situation, the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus" which is the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 are used according to the stop order and stop position. It is configured so that different types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of condition devices, the condition devices with the same winning number are grouped together and are in the third column from the right, "condition device (name)". It is illustrated in the item of. Specifically, for example, in the "re-game-A" which is a conditional device corresponding to the winning number 1, "re-game" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices, "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03", are configured to be stopped and displayed. The "conditional device (name)" may be simply referred to as a conditional device. In addition, a condition device related to a re-game such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device such as "winning 01" in which a game medal is paid out may be referred to as a small role. A condition device in which the BB is started by displaying a stop such as "Type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination will be won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination will be stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not displayed. Is configured to stop and display. Specifically, for example, when the condition device of the winning number 21 "1st class BB-B + winning-C" is won, the cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" and "1st class BB". Any of the black sevens that are "-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 are placed on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which (see the reel arrangement of) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And, regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11 or 16 corresponding to the above are stopped, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. If this is the case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will be stopped at the bottom of the right reel M53, and the BB combination will be stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "role" item, the role of the "conditional device (name)" is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless of the RT state, the replay combination that does not shift to the RT state is stopped and displayed. The "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. The state does not change. The re-game combination is stopped and displayed. It is a condition device related to the re-game, but by pushing it backwards (stopping the reels in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51), the right reel M53 The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are stopped at the operation timing located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed on the lower row of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be aligned on the lower row from the player's point of view. There is. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-B and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at "White Seven" by pushing backward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. The "forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is placed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed, and it is configured so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-C and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the production (details will be described later) instructing to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination that is stopped and displayed may be different depending on (), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to the re-game 01, the re-game 02, or the re-game 03. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52, the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the re-game 01 or the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is used. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", stop in the order of pushing "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answering in the order of pressing) is the maximum number of winnings. The symbol combination that becomes "winning 01" that can acquire 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one piece is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different, that is, the push order is not navigated to the states related to AT such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can obtain 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a conditional device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. 9 is won. In 14, three watermelons A are aligned in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the prize number 66 in FIG. 9 is awarded. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that allows three bells to be aligned on the effective line, and the details will be described later, but the winning is done during the BB. It is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by doing so. Further, the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. Although the details will be described later, it is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (19) that includes one type BB-A. Bonus winning information of 1, type 1 BB-B winning number (20-23) bonus winning information 2, 1 type BB-C winning number (24-27) bonus winning information 3 It is supposed to be. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. , 1 to 18 winning / re-gaming winning information is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the re-gaming combination or the small winning combination. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which re-game combination or small combination has been won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "directing group number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball output group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and the stored payout group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery) to execute a lottery process related to AT. It is possible to reduce the program and data capacity for this. Even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if the conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery may be configured so that the payout group number can be executed. When the condition device to be 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable to configure the lottery result so that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the present embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing (also called a winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the re-gaming combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the "re-gaming combination" (the total appearance of all the re-gaming combinations) appears. The rate) is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" (so-called fall re-game combination, "RT1", which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and a symbol corresponding to the re-game combination in a situation where the bonus is not won. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" thereafter) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In "RT2", "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. When "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, it is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40). (Displayed as "Sorry") is executed, and when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though the "re-game 04" was stopped and displayed. It can enhance the sex. In addition, in such a configuration, the sound effect output by the stop display of "re-game 04" and the re-game combination other than "re-game 04" (for example, "re-game" in which the RT state does not shift). 01 ") may be configured to be different from the output sound effect due to the stop display, and by such a configuration, the player recognizes that" replay 04 "is stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases related to AT where push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state" and may be referred to as non-AT gaming state) and states related to AT where push order navigation can occur (for example, "". It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and may be referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when the winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT gaming state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful not to let the RT state fall. In addition, the "re-game 05" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (the re-game role that can notify that the AT addition lottery has been won when the stop is displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in, and almost never appears in other RT states. It should be noted that the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as the replaying role will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order, which is most advantageous to the player, can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. .. There is no problem even if the lottery probability is changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination overlap.

Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the BB roles of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single roles that do not overlap with the small roles). If a BB role is won, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new winning of the BB role becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small role becomes valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won. , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 0 "missing" is won. In addition, one kind BB-
A will continue to be elected. Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are played. If the overlapping conditional devices are won, the new winning of the BB winning combination is invalid, and only the winning of the small winning combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation where the player is "RT2" and has won (carried over) the 1st class BB-A, he / she won the "1st class BB-B + winning-C" winning number 21. In that case, the type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 14 "winning-C" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. It should be noted that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the replaying combination of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying combination in which the RT state can be transitioned), the bonus is also won when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to give the player expectations. In this configuration, the RT state is controlled so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have changed the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability is not low (frequently won the replay), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In this embodiment, during the BB operation, the "common bell" of the winning number 13 and the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" of the winning number 17 and the "BB medium and strong rare small role" of the winning number 18 are used. It is configured so that three small roles with "(V-shaped bell alignment)" can be won, and while the BB won in "AT in progress" is operating, "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" Or, if the player wins the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)", the AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

Further, in the upper part of the figure, the small winning combination appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 steps in this example). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is. Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, when a player advances a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning times) of a common bell, the common bell is frequently won to relate to the gaming machine being played. The game can be advanced with the expectation that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high-probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as a lottery related to AT).

In addition, the middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress state", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small winning combination, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game ( It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a 3-card bet. If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, it is expected. The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is "total number of replays (total number of replays 1 to 6) x number of replays (3) + small wins (11). Total number of placements (small combination appearance rate) (total number of placements for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 pieces) in small combination (11-card combination) / total number of all placements (65536) ) ”. Further, the expected value of increase / decrease in medals per game can be calculated as "average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3 cards)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, the number of medals inserted per game is expected to increase or decrease. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, "RT1" has the relatively largest expected medal increase / decrease value per game. The figures in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game is advanced in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case where the operation is performed in the optimum operation mode or a case where the operation is performed in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is smaller than 1 under the situation where push order navigation does not occur, and medals. Will decrease. In this embodiment, even in "RT0" or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is push order navigation, but the expected value is not limited to 1, and "RT0" is not limited to this. Or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game when there is push order navigation may be smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but in calculating the expected value of medal increase / decrease in this embodiment, medals are used. The calculation is based on the assumption that three medals will be paid out. In addition, one game may be referred to as one game.

Further, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0" and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 3.67137146. Further, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0" and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 1.223790487, and when there is push order navigation, the RT state of "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small winning combination and the re-gaming combination are just examples. For example, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in "RT2" in which BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation). The expected value of increase / decrease in medals) may be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, when push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), when the bonus is not aligned in the game where the bonus can be aligned. However, the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and if the push order navigation occurs and if it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), the bonus can be arranged intentionally in the game. It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals held by not arranging bonuses. Specifically, it is preferable to design so that the probability of losing in "RT2" is higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations (winning-A1 to winning-I) won in "RT2". It is preferable to determine the winning probability of the re-gaming role so that it is designed so that the winning probability of the re-gaming role is high. It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much). In "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all the small wins is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the first type BB-A is assigned to 40, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. Further, the appearance rate of the first type BB-C is assigned to 160, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, as for the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 120 is assigned to setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of the first type BB-B differs depending on the set value. In this way, the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C may be referred to as a setting difference BB and a setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference and a bonus with a setting difference). Further, the appearance rate of all of the 1st type BB-A, the 1st type BB-B and the 1st type BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT state (in "RT0" and "RT1"). The appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the set value. The total appearance rate as the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the set value. Even when configured, Type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with a setting difference.

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, the electrical schematic configuration of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the revolving game machine according to the present embodiment, the sub-control board S, the door board D, the revolving board K, the power supply board E, the relay board IN, centering on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game. The setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game unit) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P. The main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the CPUC100, the built-in ROMC110, the built-in RAMC120, and the like are connected and mounted on the main control chip C so as to be able to exchange data with each other by a bus. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, and the rotating cylinder board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K or the like {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) toward the sub-control board S. By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S can execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board SC (sometimes referred to as a sub-control means, a sub-board, a sub-control means, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S also has a sub-control chip SC mounted on the sub-control board M as well as the above-mentioned main control board M. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Further, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating cylinder backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotating cylinder backlight S30, and the like. Is being produced.

On the door substrate D, the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals to end the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game {not shown, but described above. The input number display lamp D210, start lamp D180, replay lamp D290, inputtable lamp D300, special game status display device D250, payout number display device (push order display device) D270 are credit number display device D200, advantageous section. A collection of display devices such as the display YH}, a door switch D80 for determining the opening / closing of the front door, canceling an error, and changing a set value, a game medal (or a game medal) judged to be incompatible after being inserted. , Other foreign matter) is connected to the blocker D100 or the like for refunding to the discharge port D240. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to be able to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, the signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a rotating cylinder motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating cylinder sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating cylinder substrate K. The reel M50 can be stopped at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the spinning sensor K20. There is. Further, in the spinning machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used for the spinning motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to rotate once. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel lap are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on the control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation to put out. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, and a disk H50, which determine whether or not the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected to the hopper motor H80.

These various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from the power supply board E (the board that controls the presence / absence of power supply by the power supply switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which electric power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a broken line arrow. As shown in the figure, electric power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotating cylinder board K, relay board IN) are supplied with electric power. Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, the power is supplied to each control board and board.

Further, on the main control board M, a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error, etc. Button M30, is connected. Further, the main control board M is a state relating to a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) and an AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means to execute AT transition lottery to shift to, and AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT in progress state". It has an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the stage of developing a gaming machine, it is also possible to develop a gaming machine with different specifications at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (in this example, executed by a gaming machine with different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, preventing processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the spinning machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is turned on, and then in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data), and the total cumulative number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section +). As a result of calculating the number of games (normal section) and the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also within the range not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games-> bonus ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative continuous bonus ratio-> cumulative bonus ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts / total payouts when the RB is operating", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of the program process). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure it so that only the information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like). To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the set value (set value data) is corrected after the RAM is initialized (step 1106 and). The processing of step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112. Move to. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information may be notified. could be. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 all lights up "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, which is not suitable for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display a set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added result set value (set value data) exceeds 5). The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt time processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the condition device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). The process of setting the data) in the RAM is also included. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (step 1420 in FIG. 21, step 1429 in FIG. 22, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Set the state related to AT determined in step 1439, step 1443, step 1444-3 in FIG. 23, and step 1444-4). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state related to AT may be executed in step 1416 and step 1428 of FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is determined by the continuity / non-conduction of the current due to (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting and is set / set /. Whether or not the reset button M30 is pressed) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying combination), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the stored number (credit) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the winning probability of the re-game role is higher than that of the RT state, or when the re-game role is difficult to understand by appearance (re-game pretending to be a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet or saved (credit does not exist). In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, or the input number display lamp D210). The value is displayed (shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the transition to step 1221 is performed on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executing a process to send a command indicating that it is finished. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the insertion of medals). It has two throw-in sensors for detection, and when the first throw-in sensor D20s or the second throw-in sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (first input sensor D20s or second input sensor D20s). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). If it is determined to be Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation in which it was determined that the medal was not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M in step 1251 (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added to the lottery. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are "AT in progress state", "addition specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal middle game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous for the player if the player does not dare to align the symbol combinations of the BB in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". In addition, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and in such a configuration, the AT addition lottery is won in the "advantageous BB internal middle game". However, it may be configured to notify the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an execution process for adding the number of games, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, even if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Execute a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus combination has not been won. Since the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state", it may also be referred to as a "normal state". (2) The "normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not won. (3) The "normal BB state" is when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the situation where the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won. Alternatively, it is a state to be executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal middle game". (4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus role has not been won. , It is a state where it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". As will be described later, when the game newly shifts to the "high probability state", it is configured not to shift to the "low probability state" until the number of high-securing obstacle games has elapsed. (5) "AT in progress state""" Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuous lottery described later is won, the predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" continues (6) "Specialization precursor state". Is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state", has been acquired. (7) The "additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means that the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state where no prize has been won. (9) "Standby BB internal middle game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. .. (10) The "advantageous BB state" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role by winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". The BB combination is won and is executed when the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", or in the "low probability state". , The AT lottery was won by the BB combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game". It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) The "state for effecting resurrection" is a state related to the AT that shifts when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the "resurrection possibility production state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the revival lottery is not performed. If you win, you will be in a "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and shifts to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to determine the stop position of the pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53, and the stop order is determined. It is determined whether or not there is a request as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels. In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reeling game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing incorrect answers), 11 symbol combinations will be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). .. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (abnormal if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery). Is determined to be). The determination of whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal determines whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the winning determined by the internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the combination is not displayed as a stop from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination will be awarded. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, it is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag that is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off) and steps. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with a acquired random number, etc. are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It should be noted that the winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small winning combination are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replaying combination are won in duplicate, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number of placements for comparison with the acquired random numbers, and is previously stored in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number of consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 which are push order replaying roles is the same. Since the number of consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which is the push order bell role, is the same, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bell is used. The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. The lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying roles and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address.
The process proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 3610 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number) in step 3620, and proceeds to step 3604 to move to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the "AT in-progress state", the "specialization precursor state", or the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the payout group number related to the game is the winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the AT middle state. In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the re-game-B, re-game-C, and winning-D). If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game added to the BB ("" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). To judge. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the “additional specialization state”. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can add the remaining AT game number in the specialized middle addition role (in the "additional specialization state"), the payout group number related to the game can be added. In the "AT in progress state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6). (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 2, 13). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning game number lottery table, and determines the number of AT added games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). It should be noted that determining the number of AT addition games is also referred to as executing an AT addition lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. In addition, the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus. ..

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of winning, and in this embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, " If the additional winning combination is won in "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of AT additional games is determined by lottery from "0" to "300", and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT addition lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the additional combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and as a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In the case, {number of placements (600) x number of AT addition games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements ( 24) × number of AT additional games (100)} / total number of placements (1024) = 12.1 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number of placements (500) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (200) x number of AT additional games (50) + Calculated as the number of units (300) x number of AT additional games (100) + number of units (24) x number of AT additional games (300)} / total number of units (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, {number (300) x number of AT additional games (10) + number (600) x It can be calculated as follows: number of AT additional games (30) + number of placements (124) × number of AT additional games (50)} / total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is "additional specialization state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare role, {number of placements (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (100) ) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-strong rare role, {number of placements (300) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements (400) ) × Number of AT additional games (50) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (game).

In this embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the AT addition games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but the AT addition games number may differ depending on the set value. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 execute the same processing as the AT addition lottery, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute the process of determining whether or not the number is 8, but as in the present embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured to execute the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number. When the same process is executed as the AT additional lottery, the process related to the AT additional lottery of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Will be possible.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine by the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Is a winning number for re-game-B (reverse-push white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which White Seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-B, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the replay-B. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by the reverse push instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse push (“right → middle → left”). Will be executed to instruct to align the white sevens), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the reverse push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game as the replay-C (or the payout group number, etc.). It is determined whether or not it is a forward push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-C, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-C. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and forward push (“left → middle → right”). (The effect of instructing the black seven to be aligned) is set in, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the forward push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the forward push (“left → middle → right”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands to subordinate. It is configured so that the control board S side can execute the effect related to the push order navigation, but it is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, it is related to the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub control board S side and the sub control board S side receives the command, the push order navigation is performed on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to. As an example, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), a production mode in which a reverse push is instructed is selected. It may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and a predetermined condition thereafter (for example, a specific replay combination (for example, replay)) is performed. In a game in which (game-B or C) has been won), an effect of instructing a push order in which 7 lines can be aligned on an invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous effect) is satisfied, the number of AT games is added to the effect (displayed by the effect display device S40). It is an effect that the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, "+ 30G" may be displayed). In this example, the effect display device S40 also displays the number of remaining AT games. It is configured to be able to display such a display, and the display and the number of AT remaining games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In addition, the replay- In a game in which B is a winning game and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. As an example of executing the effect of adding the number of AT games in the game that has been played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that encourages the winning of the bonus is being executed on the sub-control board S side (inside the bonus). Then, since the winning probability of re-game-B is low (including 0%), if the push order in which 7 matches are possible is notified, the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won), etc. There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect. In addition, the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The information includes (1) the number of AT remaining games, which is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the lottery with the AT added. The difference between the information about the game and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery is grasped. (2) Obtained as a result of the AT additional game on the main control board M side. A command regarding the number of AT additional games has been transmitted to the sub-control board S side. If the AT additional lottery is not won, a command relating to the fact that the AT additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the production mode of the effect related to the push order navigation. As an example, the replay-B may be used. It ’s a winning game. Then, in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order avoids 7 sets). It may be configured to select and execute the effect mode instructing. The information on the sub-control board S side for determining that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side but the AT remaining game number was not added is as follows: (1) Information on the AT remaining game number. After the AT addition lottery, transmission is performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, on the sub-control board S side, the difference between the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time from the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is 1, it is judged that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command relating to the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state related to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", the "advantageous BB internal middle game". After that, when the BB combination wins a prize, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the "AT in progress state" and the initial number of AT games is displayed on the AT counter. The value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", it shifts to the "normal BB internal medium game" and then does not shift to the "AT in progress state". It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and if the BB is won in the "normal game state", the AT lottery may be won with the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the BB is changed. By aligning them, it will shift to the "advantageous BB state". In the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BBs are not aligned, the game section may be set as the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a first-class BB-A or a first type BB combination in which there is no setting difference BB combination). It is determined whether or not it is species BB-C). In this embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 19, 24) of the BB without setting difference and the winning numbers (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27) in which the small winning combination overlaps with the BB without setting difference are used. Both are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "advantageous BB internal middle game", and proceeds to step 1410. Further, even if No in step 1402 or 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In this embodiment, the AT winning rate (whether or not the winning is possible) related to the AT lottery is different when the state related to AT is different, but when the state related to AT is the same. The AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set value is different (if the BB is won in the "high probability state", the AT is always won regardless of the set value = then " Transition to "AT in progress").

Next, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a small state device in which the condition device related to the game can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state” by winning. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a cherry). In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, in the case of No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 1 for the high securement failure counter KHc (the final game with high securement failure, and the 10th game since the "high probability state" is reached. ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is the "high probability state", the game section is the "advantageous section", and when the game section is the "advantageous section", the push order It is configured so that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" continues. Even if you win the low-probability state transition lottery, the "high-probability state" will not end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). If the BB combination is won during the "advantageous section" and the BB is executed, the "advantageous section" can be performed at any timing even if the push order navigation has not been executed even once in the "advantageous section". It may be configured to be terminated. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as a push order combination (a winning number in which the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the profit margin of the player differs), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In this case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation of the winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 is executed once. In addition, even if No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426 or step 1428, the process proceeds to step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" is made, 10 games, which are high-securing obstacle games, are set in the high-securing obstacle counter KHc, and until the counter value becomes 0. Is configured not to transition to a "low probability state". It should be noted that such a lottery method is only an example. For example, the low-probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high-probability state" (the stay in the "high-probability state" is guaranteed. ), The lottery for shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the lapse of the 10 games. It should be noted that the AT lottery combination (low probability AT lottery combination, high probability AT lottery combination) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all the set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 games or more, the watermelon B With a 1/2 chance of winning the game, you can get the right to move to the "additional specialization state" and move to the "specialization precursor state", while the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". , When the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 3 games or less, a lottery (specialization) to acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" even if the watermelon B is won. It is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state" without executing the state transition lottery). The lottery is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It may be configured to be able to execute (sometimes referred to as), and in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is given. If the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game that wins the lottery can be (shifted to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state", or the AT counter value. May be configured to be (or transition to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" when becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or the game won in the lottery. After the execution of a predetermined number of games, it may be configured to be in (or shift to) a “specialization precursor state” or an “additional specialization state”. In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state". You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can execute a lottery in which the conditional device related to the game can acquire the transfer right to the specialization transition combination (“additional specialization state””. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "specialization precursor state", and shifts to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is reached). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery to win with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to step 1444-1 (AT state shiftable condition). The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the requirements. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. In addition, even if No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the AT counter M60 is set to the initial value of 50 games again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per set has a playability of continuing to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the final AT game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of AT (the first game newly in the "AT in progress" state or the AT counter M60). The first game) may be configured to perform a continuous lottery. With such a configuration, it has already been determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) in the "AT in progress state". , The effect during AT can be different depending on whether the continuous lottery is won or not. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (song is played, etc.) in a situation of 1 or more (during the execution of AT), or to execute an effect in which it is definite that the continuous lottery has been won.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state for effecting resurrection. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a resurrection role (by winning in the "resurrection possibility production state", in the next game. It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the "AT in progress state", in other words, a role that can pull back the AT). Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection role includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and a bonus role (only the BB role with no setting difference and not the BB role with the setting difference). When the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection role, it is said that the resurrection lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transitionable condition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. Even if No in step 1441-1, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game is the final AT game and the continuous lottery is not won, the game shifts to the "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" and is revived in the "revival / non-recoverable production state". If the lottery can be won, it is configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" from the next game. In addition, although the "state for revival possibility production" is an "advantageous section", the lottery related to AT in the "AT in progress state" (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. It is configured, and the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state related to the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization precursor”. Satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursor games, are exhausted in "State"). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, "specialization". If the number of precursor games is exhausted in "precursor state", it is decided to be "additional specialization state"). Even if No in step 1445 or 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC100 of the main control board M guarantees a high secured fault counter value command (in this example, it is a command to the sub side, and the current high secured fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command related to the remaining number of games that has been played) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB internal middle game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high secured fault counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1450). Even if No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1450).

In this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB combination (BB combination with no setting difference) is won in the "low probability state", the AT transition lottery is won. No (then does not shift to the "AT in progress state") On the other hand, if the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "high probability state", the AT transition lottery is won (then to the "AT in progress state"). (Migrate), but not limited to this, the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery, and the "high probability state A" and "high probability" are the states related to the AT, which is the "advantageous section". When configured to have "state B", if the condition device A is won in the "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device is won in the "high probability state B". If A is won, the AT transition lottery may be won at 1/2. If the AT transition lottery is won, the AT transition state is changed to the "AT preparation state", which is the preparation state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then a predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation"). It may be configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" when 10 games have passed since the shift to the "state".

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a combination with a push order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the push order, for example, winning-A1 or the like). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). See Figure 34 for an image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels that is most profitable to the player on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as a push order navigation, a push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed by the push order display device D270 as "= 1". In both the push order bell and the push order replay, it is configured to be displayed as "= 1". In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay game, " The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

If No in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is used as the predetermined address of the RAM. Remember in. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, it is considered to be a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order)} for the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is suitable, for example, the RT state changes depending on the pushing order. Multiple winning / replay winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a symbol combination that serves as a replaying role is used as one production group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 are designated as production group 4). The group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the provided winning / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replay after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. Even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number is used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided (for example, the winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 is the winning / re-gaming winning information 19 (newly provided winning) which is the winning / re-gaming winning information after mask processing.・ Re-game winning information), etc.). If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game that does not notify the operation information, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and then steps. Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In this embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the fall re-game combination is included → the fall re-game combination is not stopped and displayed. The order is navigating, (2) in the case of bells (1 piece combination / 11 piece combination) → the push order with the largest number of payouts is navigating, and so on. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is displayed on the sub-control board S side. (A number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), while the sub-control board S when the game section is a "normal section" It is configured so that the production group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-gaming winning information related to the game, including the winning / re-gaming winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is used as it is on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit the effect group number concealing the information related to the push order to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is executed when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S to determine the effect group number. However, the effect group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / replay winning information related to the winning combination (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.) having the same role. Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {processing to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and then send it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, a command for indicating that the reel starts rotating can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initially has 1500, which is the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 (the decrement counter, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high securing failure counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). Even if No in step 3402, step 3408 or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the "AT in progress state", the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the "advantageous BB state" and "advantageous BB state" In the case of "advantageous BB internal middle game", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. That is, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the state shifts from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is maintained while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured so that the transition (transition) can be performed in the order of "state"->"specialization precursor state"->"additional specialization state". Even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. You may control it. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α" which is the sum of the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery is , "Α" in a specific game after the game (a game that meets certain conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) without notifying the game. You may notify). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of AT remaining games is subtracted for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning when the bonus is won in a state where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that encourages whether or not the bonus is won can be executed by using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is "30", or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of winning and adding as a result of the AT addition lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, continuous production over multiple games is executed to encourage whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". , The winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or ball ejection group number) in which the game can be executed and the AT addition lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "0". Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transitionable conditions are the execution of RAM clear (RAM initialization), the stop display of the re-game (in this example, the stop display of the re-game 04), and the winning / starting of the BB. -It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not RT state transition is possible and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enable condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (Refer to the figure), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). Even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure. Will be migrated. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition to "RT0" is performed. The stop display of the re-game 04 is specifically when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1". , Re-games 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. , The RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

Further, when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the condition device related to the first type BB-A to C operates). The RT state shifts to "RT2". In addition, when the BB role is won in "RT2" (class 1 BB-A to C operate), the process shifts to "class 1 BB-A, B, C". Further, when the BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (the operation of Type 1 BB-A to C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, when the state related to AT is "low probability state", the BB is won, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to "RT1" which is highly profitable for the player. Since the push order navigation does not occur in the state, when the "re-game-D1 to D3" is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, and the right button). One of the three choices is the correct push order and the re-games other than the re-game 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are the incorrect push order and the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the game 04, the replay 04 will be stopped and displayed, and the game will shift from "RT1" to "RT0". In addition, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state is reached. Will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which push-order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game-D1 to D3" is won, re-game 04 Will navigate the push order of the correct answer that does not stop and display, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. The conditions for shifting to the AT state are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" is completed, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) the revival lottery is won. Satisfy if you do. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly shifts to the "AT precursor state", and the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, during AT). The number of games in which the subtraction is started after the transition to the "state") is set in the AT counter M60, and the transition to step 1756 is performed. Even if No in step 1756, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the number of high-securing obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high-securing obstacle counter, and performs the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", by winning the BB, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB state" and the AT game in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", 80 (initial value 50 + addition 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, if the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the start of the "AT in progress state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT in progress" or in a state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional production that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game (the state related to AT is "AT in progress") after the end of BB. (The subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" , "Advantageous BB internal game", "Advantageous BB state", and "Resurrection possibility production state", and there are 10 AT-related states. The state will shift. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special state transition lottery in which the watermelon B is won in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) after shifting to the "specialized precursor state", the game is configured to shift to the "additional specialized state". As the game section, the states related to the three ATs of "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "normal BB state" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state" and "AT in progress". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" have become "advantageous sections". Set. That is, even if the state related to the seven ATs that are the "advantageous section" is transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without setting the "normal section", the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated. It is set to "normal section". In addition, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the "AT in progress state", the "specialization precursor state", or the "additional specialization state". However, the gaming state is maintained.

As described above, when the AT counter M60 is in the "AT in progress state" and the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery is not won, the "Resurrection possibility / rejection effect state" is set. If you win the revival lottery in the "resurrection possibility production state", you can return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the "resurrection possibility production state", the process shifts to the "low probability state" and the "advantageous section" changes to the "normal section".

When the BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB without setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" To move to. Also, when the "AT in progress state" is won with no setting difference BB (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C), the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, " It shifts to "AT in progress". In addition, when the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A or 1st class BB-C) is won in the "recoverable or not staging state", the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Also shifts to "AT in progress" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "state for effect of resurrection", the BB with a setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the BB with a setting difference becomes independent. If the winning number is related to the BB role (winning number 20), it will be in a "low probability state" after the end of the BB (because the BB role with a setting difference will not win the revival lottery), and the BB with a setting difference will be rare. If the winning number is the same as the winning number (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB (because the rare role will be the trigger to win the revival lottery).

In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the case of the "advantageous section" and the "high probability state", the BB with the setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Move to "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to the AT that shifts after the end of the "advantageous BB state" is the state after the end of the winning BB during the AT ("AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state") (setting difference). (Both with BB and BB without setting difference) shifts to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and is in non-AT ( After the end of the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". In addition, there is a setting difference in winning during non-AT (“high probability state”), and after the end of BB, the state shifts to the “high probability state”.

The state related to AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and the AT lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" and shift to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. By winning, the AT lottery is executed, and if the AT lottery is not won, it shifts to the "Gase precursor state" and shifts to the "low probability state" or "high probability state" after 16 to 32 games have passed. It may be configured to do so. Further, a "waiting section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as the game section. For example, when the AT lottery is executed by winning the "cherry", the BB If you win the "BB + Cherry" where the cherry and the cherry overlap, and you win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + Cherry" wins is configured as the "waiting section". You may. In this way, by providing the "waiting section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT. In the case where the lottery is won and the period until the symbol combinations of BB are complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is off, so the AT lottery is won. It is possible to incite the player whether or not it is. Further, if the BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. Executes an AT additional lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress state" as the BB won in the "addition specialization state" (for example, wins the AT additional lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress state". It may be configured so that the number of AT games is added and the number of games per game is relatively large). Further, if the BB is elected in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB. The AT addition lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "addition specialization state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, the game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and relatively high for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 0 in the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the "specialization precursor state" is described. Things will also be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, and for example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, information related to AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) Since all the information related to) is cleared, the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the game remaining number counter YKc-1 in the advantageous section, a flag indicating the game state, and the like. In addition, these information will be cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, but depending on the RAM clear when the setting is changed, "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , While clearing information related to "number of stored sheets", etc., depending on the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section), "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , Information related to "number of stored sheets" etc. is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3515) are different. It should be noted that the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, so that the "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" may be maintained. In addition, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared in the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to delete the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and the information on how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes a "low probability state", and (2) if the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the state related to AT becomes "low probability state" in the next game. "Normal BB internal game", (3) If the current AT-related state is "advantageous BB state", the AT-related state will be "normal BB state" in the next game, (4) Currently If the AT-related state of is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "recoverable / non-recoverable production state", the AT-related state is "low probability" in the next game. It is configured to be "state" (because the information related to AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” is completed, and proceeds to step 3528. It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous section" is completed and set to the "normal section", but the detailed turn-off timing is not limited to the timing of the present embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the "advantageous section" ends and becomes the "normal section". In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off before the start lever D50, which enables the start of the next game, is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an "advantageous section", and shifts to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, it was decided that the CPUC100 of the main control board M was newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it was decided to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section display YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous section" (the game in the "normal section") to the timing when the game medal can be inserted in the new "advantageous section" game (newly "" If the game before the "advantageous section" is a game related to replay, set appropriately during the period (until the timing when the start lever operation becomes effective in the new "advantageous section" game). May be good.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking an input port of a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power supply cutoff process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power cutoff detection signal, the input reception sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. Information related to the detection of D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously turned on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. It can also be detected that it is). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to drive control of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details thereof. Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has all the error flags turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of sheets error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, and the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, the door switch flag, etc. are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error corresponding to the error flag that is turned on (an error that is currently occurring) is configured to be transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the relevant command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of the error changes, such as the second error (for example, the payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set. Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (sending the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Command related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (only during advantageous section)), command related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels are stopped and when the next game is started), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels stop and the next game start), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to result in an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, 7). Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it is supplemented that the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and shifts to step 6106. On the other hand, even if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, even if No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M has executed all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). It is determined whether or not the timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel constant speed maintenance process, and proceeds to step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, after the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the reel constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116), the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (corresponds to the process of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. In the case of Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M has elapsed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state in step 6124. Determine if it has been done. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally set to the constant speed by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 steps can be rotated with 400 interrupt processes), and the reel rotation speed is constant. It is longer than the time for one rotation (one turn) of the reel (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, how far is the distance between the index and the reel sensor (distance until the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes the constant speed state. However, when the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel reacceleration process, and shifts to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. , The reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) is executed. Even if No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process require interrupt processing for each combination of the exciting phase of the stepping motor and the combination of the exciting phases. The number of executions of may be different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop process according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, and for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is set by operating the stop button. It is determined whether or not the reels have been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state, and shifts to step 6134. On the other hand, even if No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and shifts to the process of step 6142. Even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process proceeds to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing at which the reel deceleration process is executed ends) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1612). Even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotational operation of the reel M50 of the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (reel). When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor), the phase to be excited is switched, and the stepping motor is 1-2. Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, among Φ0 to Φ3, the one indicating which phase is specified to be excited is shown in the column of “Phase to be excited” (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" at the top of the figure, the drive state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is set according to the drive pattern according to each drive state. The drive is controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, and the horizontal axis is time and the time elapses to the right. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, and this is limited to the case where the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or causing step-out. It is not (the case where the reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped, and when the "reel stop state" is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. .. Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from the operation of the start lever D50 until the acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) of the stepping motor is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time from the time when the reel drive state becomes the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is timed, and the start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If this is the case, the "reel rotation start standby state" is set.

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is “reel constant speed”. It is configured to update to "state"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times to drive the reel. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final in the "reel acceleration state". The combination of exciting phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, which is the same as the "reel constant speed state" in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of exciting phases. (When the reel rotation abnormality does not occur). With this configuration, the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed can be stably executed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The "exciting phase" is a combination of the exciting phases, and the "interrupt execution count" indicates the number of times the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the exciting phases is executed. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to excite 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and (KA) "φ0" interrupts the interrupt process 100 times → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing 30 times at "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing 15 times at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" Interrupt processing 8 times at (KF) "φ2, φ3" → Interrupt processing 2 times at (KG) "φ3" → Interrupt at (KH) "φ3, φ0" It is configured to execute interrupt processing once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of times interrupt processing is executed is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is changed). As described above, in this example, when the reel acceleration processing is executed, the number of times the interrupt processing is executed by the combination of the exciting phases of 1 is gradually reduced.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing the reel constant speed maintenance process), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) at "φ0, φ1". Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is executed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once for each interrupt processing. It is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). As described above, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the interrupt process is executed once with the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Is updated to. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which the combination of exciting phases is switched for each interrupt process), and is a "reel deceleration standby state". "" Indicates the state from the operation of the stop button by the player to the start of the stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reel slips corresponding to the number of slip frames). .. The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at the timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform 4-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

As described above, in the reeling game machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the reel acceleration processing. Further, whether the reel has been accelerated normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is the process of step 6124 (the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state). Judgment is made after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update), but the reel is not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index in the process of step 6124 (reel rotation failure). If it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred), the reel reacceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel rotation failure is subsequently performed. If the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be reached to a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. By detecting the index by the reel sensor until a predetermined time elapses after being updated to, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, and the player is executed by executing the reel re-acceleration process. It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated) to occur. Further, by configuring so that the process of determining whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed is not executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. Since it is configured in this way, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the spinning machine according to this example is executing the reel acceleration process, it acts as follows. Will be.

<Action 1> Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process execution ends → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is performed Execution-> Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel constant speed maintenance process-> Reel rotation failure is detected-> Reel re-acceleration process is executed. In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), and the reel is accelerated due to step-out. Refers to the case where is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even when the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly advanced.

<Action 2> Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed → Reel acceleration End of processing → Update reel drive state to reel constant speed state → Execute reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect reel rotation failure → Execute reel reacceleration process It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. Will be possible.

<Action 3> Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Power off occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovery from power off → Continues reel acceleration processing Execution (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index, the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, if a power failure occurs during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel reacceleration process when the index is detected, and by such a configuration, the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) due to the reel reacceleration process. It can be made less likely to occur.

<< Action after operation of the final stop button >> The spinning reel type gaming machine according to this example is the final reel (reel that rotates to the end and is the third reel) after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button). When the reel) is stopped and the symbol combination that is the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medal can be paid out. However, the action related to the payout of the game medal is as follows. You may.

<Action 1> Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operates the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is a stop display → 3rd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 3rd reel (operation of the 3rd stop button) (Accept) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power cut occurs → The third reel moves to the stop display position (rotation) → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is executed → Power recovery → Reel wins The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped display → the process related to the payout of the game medal is executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in the game such as the common bell mentioned above, in which a small winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button if won is won. Even if a power outage occurs immediately after a power outage in the amusement park, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of slip frames is the maximum), the power outage is detected before the power outage is detected. It can be configured to complete the movement (rotation) to the planned stop position. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2> Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operates the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is a stop display → 3rd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 3rd reel (operation of the 3rd stop button) (Accept) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the winning combination on the reel from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example, a bell. In the game in which the role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning combination, was not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed) → The process related to the payout of the game medal may be executed. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. , Accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out, and the player is less likely to be disadvantaged. can do.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power cutoff process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits the writing of the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a push order display of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. The table on the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information related to the push order, which is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub control board S in this example). It is a table showing the correspondence with. For example, it is shown that the instruction number for notifying "middle->right->left" as the push order is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the staging display device S40 when the push order is “left → middle → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”). The image displayed in is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example has a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. Further, when the medals are paid out, the number of the paid out medals is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 is whether the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 should display "=" in the left digit like "= 1". By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the left side is "=" and the right side is a number as the display of the push order display device D270. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that it is a push order navigation display, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an “advantageous section” is lit. At the same time, the display of "remaining 40 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, the right side in the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section", the advantageous section display YH lights up, and the display of "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that, among the condition devices in which the combination displayed as stopped depending on the reel stop order is different, the combination with the push order (the condition device accompanied by the payout of medals, for example, the bell) and the replay combination with the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the condition devices having different combinations to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replay combination) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to light a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number to give an instruction. In addition, the advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right of the credit number display device D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check if there are any medals left. Then, if there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the game from being accidentally stopped even though it is an "advantageous section" from the next game by turning on the settlement button D60 before it becomes effective. be able to.

Further, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and a section indicator similar to the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section indicator is provided). It may be configured (with two), and in such a configuration, when the section indicator on the left side lights up, it notifies that the current game section is a "normal section", and on the other hand, it is on the right side. When the section display lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section". Furthermore, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal section" and "red" in the "advantageous section". Alternatively, it may be configured to be lit in the "normal section" and "blinking" in the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is configured to be changed according to "AT during BB internal game", "AT during BB state", "AT precursor state", "AT during state", etc. in the "advantageous section". You may. Further, it may be configured so that the current gaming section can be recognized as a "waiting section" by distinguishing it from a "normal section" and an "advantageous section". However, the distinction between "normal section" and "advantageous section" is made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is the "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easy to do.

Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. It may be configured (not notifying the disadvantage to the player that the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is subtracted in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player). However, even in such a configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to notify the player that the section is in the "advantageous section". At the same time, it is preferable that the section display is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and the section display is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing> First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing the sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of the checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later in step 2010. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power was cut off, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the command is completely restored, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts in step 2012, and executes the command when a power failure occurs. 1 Return the process to the command process.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, when it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or if No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing> Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. This one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is returned to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms and can be appropriately changed according to the process.

<Sub-side power off-off process> Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing the sub-side power-off process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power cut-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates the checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power cutoff process is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2212 whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of momentary interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the process executed when the power is turned off. If it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process is returned to step 2210 described above.

<1 Command Processing> Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command processing that is called and executed in the processing of step 2250 of FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect-related determination process at the time of starting lever operation, which will be described later. do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation time process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, in the case of the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2258 whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, in the case of the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2262 whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls the subroutine of the third reel stop time effect-related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the third body stop acceptance processing described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2266 whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, in the case of the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stop display symbol time processing (not shown) in step 2268, and step 7100. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is based on the high-secured failure counter value command received from the main control board M side, and the number of high-secured failure games remaining at the present time (high probability state). Check how many games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the battle effect execution enable / disable determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-securing obstacle games. Based on this, the stay stage transition lottery (lottery for whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Refer to), the stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the AT-time effect determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “recoverable / non-recoverable effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the resurrection possibility effect determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advance notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). The stay stage is mainly a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured so that any stay stage is always set. If the stay stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effect, notice effect, etc. will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution possibility determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example) of winning the battle effect execution possibility lottery (whether or not to execute the battle effect (win)). Lottery) is executed. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the battle effect executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, if No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, and the battle effect is won, that is, the battle effect (win) is executed, and the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that the winning is definite. The configuration related to the battle production is not limited to this, and even if the AT lottery is not won, if the BB role is won (after the end of the BB, the state shifts to the "low probability state" or the "high probability state". ) May be configured to perform a battle effect (victory).

If No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A), and prize-E (watermelon B), and the role can be won in duplicate with the BB role. It has become. That is, in the case of Yes in step 3064, where the player has the expectation that the rare role is stopped and displayed at the same time as the BB role, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is , A lottery for whether or not to execute the Gase Battle effect (a lottery for whether or not to execute the battle effect (defeat)) to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/3, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ) Is executed. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the gasse battle effect executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). If No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and the next process (process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-securing obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is 4 or more, continuous production such as a battle production can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of high-securing obstacle games is predetermined. If it is less than the number, for example, if it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute the continuous effect such as the battle effect, so that the "low probability state" is entered even though the continuous effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from turning off due to the transition of ("normal section" is set), and the battle effect is performed only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be lit until the battle effect is completed. By executing this, it is possible to make the game machine user-friendly without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

In addition, when the role of rare is won, it is configured so that continuous production such as battle production (defeat) can be executed, so the frequency of execution of battle production can be guaranteed and the game always progresses with a sense of expectation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an excerpt of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the "low probability state" and when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. It consists of three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "low probability state", the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the corresponding number is It is stipulated. In the "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of staging stages, the desert stage and the city stage, and the transition stages are the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal medium game", and a "high probability state".

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of places when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the number of placements is defined. Has been done. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of units. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the city stage, and 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as the number. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of positions when the game shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the number of positions. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage.

The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of positions when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the stay stage of the skeleton game are displayed. , The relationship with the number is specified. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is the city stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 19. Assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 29 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of units when the conference room stage is maintained in the game is 60 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a cave stage and you want to move to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 29. Assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 100 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a low probability state, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

Thus, in the "low probability state", two stages, a desert stage or a city stage, may be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, in the "high probability state", four stages, a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section", while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section", and can be selected in the "normal section". The stay stage of 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where you cannot expect to win the AT lottery, by selecting the stay stage that can be the stay stage in the "advantageous section", you will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state", that is, when the "advantageous section" becomes the "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the stage of the "advantageous section". By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to determine the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and the game can be continued while maintaining a sense of expectation.

A part of the staging stage selected in the "normal section" overlaps with the staging stage selected in the "advantageous section" (a staging stage that can be selected in the "normal section" but is not selected in the "advantageous section". You may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less, and the number of high-securing obstacle games is increased. When the number of games decreases (3 games or less), do not shift to a stay stage with high expectations, which is an "advantageous section" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). By configuring it, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the "normal section" is reached with a small number of games even though the stage has shifted to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from those with low expectations (difficult to select in "advantageous section"), which are "advantageous sections".

In addition, the composition of the stay stage is not limited to that of this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is won in the expectation degree which is an "advantageous section", the expectation degree which has won the AT lottery, and the BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in the game in which the BB role or the rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT lottery is not executed by winning the single rare role. The expectation of winning the AT lottery differs depending on the stage of stay that has been transferred. You can also configure it so that the expectation of winning the BB role differs depending on the transitioned stay stage, and configure it in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in ascending order of expectation. Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an AT-in-time effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continuously incites the effect related to the game (success) (AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words. Then, it is definite that the initial value is set in the AT counter M60 continuously for the AT (the effect of notifying that the state related to the AT of the next game is the "AT in progress state") or the AT continuation fanning effect (failure). Instead, it is determined that the state related to the AT of the next game is the "AT in progress state" or the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect effect state"), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (success) and the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) are determined at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, in this embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game to be played, the revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player is configured to feel as if he / she has won the revival lottery (actually, he / she has won the continuous lottery, and the main control board M. As the control on the side, it is the same as when the AT continuous fanning effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "state for revival possibility production", but {win the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game}, and win the continuous production. By configuring so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even if the resurrection effect is executed, the rate at which the resurrection effect (success) is executed when the resurrection effect is executed can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection effect. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT continuous fanning effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be the AT final stage effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) executed in the "state for effect of resurrection"). In this process, it is determined that the “AT in progress” has been continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, even if No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an effect of adding an effect related to the game (an effect of notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET" or the like. ), And the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be the effect during AT (the effect executed during AT such as "AT in progress"), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection possibility effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (the effect is the same as the effect executed in step 3116 described above. It is a production to notify that the revival lottery has been won in the "recovery availability production state", and in the next game, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S did not win the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) of the effect related to the game. It is an effect to notify the fact, and it is decided to shift to the "low probability state" in the next game), and the process shifts to the next process (process of step 2300).

As mentioned above, the "recoverable / non-recoverable state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game of the "AT in progress") which is the "advantageous section". Even if it does not exist, the player confirms whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is configured to extend the "advantageous section" even in the next game "state for effect of resurrection". It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the revival production is successful, and the result of the revival production will be paid attention to. Further, as described above, the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the “AT in progress state” and the “recoverable / non-recoverable effect state”. That is, the execution mode of the lottery related to AT is different between the next game that wins the continuous lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the game that wins the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, in the next game in which the AT in-progress state is completed, one game is shifted to the "revival possibility production state", and the revival lottery is executed in the "revival possibility production state". By doing so, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to be turned on, the effect of the effect is produced. Although it was prevented that it could be determined whether or not the AT was terminated without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows. (1) The state related to AT is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, and the resurrection in the game before the game in which the resurrection lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding AT is obtained. (2) It is configured not to execute the revival lottery, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the "AT in progress state" ends depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game of the running set, etc.). With such a configuration, a resurrection effect (success) and a resurrection effect (failure) can be executed as the effect on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the production, "Game before the final AT game: AT continuation fanning production (success) → AT final game: Production to the effect that the next set of AT will start", "Game before the AT final game: AT continuation fanning" Direction (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation fanning production (success) "," Game before AT final game: AT continuation fanning production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success) "," AT It may be configured to execute the game before the final game: AT continuation fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: resurrection effect (failure). That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT in progress state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and the sub-control board S side is directed. It may be configured to execute the AT continuous fanning effect or the revival effect. (3) In a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the effect is that the resurrection effect (success) is performed from the predetermined timing. That is, it may be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In such a configuration, the predetermined timing is (1) the bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and the continuous lottery is won. It is the start lever operation timing related to the game in which (2) the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect mode is the same as that of the resurrection effect (defeat). The effect is not executed, (3) the timing when the stop button that is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing when the first stop is turned on), and (4) the revival effect (success). ) Is executed. The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button which is the first stop related to the game (the timing when the first stop is turned on → off) and (5) the revival effect (success) are executed. The timing when the stop button that is the second stop related to the game is pressed (the timing when the second stop is turned on), and (6) the stop button that is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is pressed. The timing when the back stop button is released (the timing when the second stop is turned on → off), and the timing when the stop button which is the third stop related to the game in which the (7) revival effect (success) is executed is pressed (the third stop). Timing when it was turned on), (8) Timing when the stop button was released after pressing the stop button which is the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop was turned on → off). ), Etc., (9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and (10) Game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. It may be the start lever operation timing related to the next game of. In addition, when it is configured to determine which of the various timings (1) to (10) to be used by lottery, after the timing when the stop button, which is the first stop, is pressed, is used. Since the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit even when neither the continuous lottery nor the revival lottery is won, the player presses the stop button which is the third stop and then the stop button. You can play the game with the expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when you release the game or the start lever operation timing related to the next game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Process at the time of start lever operation> Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing the process at the time of start lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT-during state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT-in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-time process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is the specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the specialization precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation, which will be described later. It is executed and moved to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the state related to AT "additional specialization state". It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is the "addition specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "additional specialization state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the state related to AT to "advantageous BB inside". It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal intermediate game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a subroutine of advantageous BB internal intermediate processing when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal middle game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is whether or not the RT state is "RT1". To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, when the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no push order navigation (push order navigation is the state related to AT). It is a state related to the AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal game", a "normal BB state", or the like). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, when the state related to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. As described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT addition lottery winning and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games has elapsed from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress", and the AT counter value becomes 0, so that the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". In that case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay is won, the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven will be selected. It is configured to navigate the push order that is not in a straight line. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", it is still an "advantageous section". The push order bell may be configured to generate push order navigation, but the push order replay may be configured so that push order navigation does not occur.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, and No in step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in step 2316 based on the state related to AT, and then displays the effect image and the background image. (Processing in step 2110).

<Process during AT during start lever operation> Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing the process during AT during start lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and the instruction number in step 2356. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to the winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order replay game are displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number and the display color related to the number is the same. ) Can be applied when it is configured to be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and the push order bell is used. It may be configured to display different effects images when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → middle → right" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is circled. Display in the display mode.

Next, if No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order replay is one of the replay-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, if No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of step 2360, 2364 or 2368 described above, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

In the case of No in step 2376, or when the process of step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2380 or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in the display mode A (the above-mentioned display mode). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is more conspicuous than B). Here, if there are four or more games, the display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, the display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2388. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

In the case of No in step 2386, or when the process of step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display in step 2392. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2390 or when the process of step 2392 is executed. In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the white seven and black seven do not stop and display on the invalid line. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to have a small number of AT remaining games. Can be configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B by displaying an arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed) is continued. , Battle effect) is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the battle effect so as not to interfere with the visibility of the battle effect. be able to. Further, by configuring in this way, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" ends, the battle effect is in progress. If a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push command is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message that "AT in progress" is terminated is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added to the game that won the AT additional lottery. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

<Special precursor processing at the time of start lever operation> Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing the special precursor processing at the time of start lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and the instruction number in step 2406. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to the winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, a number indicating the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is enclosed in a star. Display in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the push order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in step 2412, and the condition device of the game is the push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of the re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the pressing order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the forward push instruction command. Judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2418. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2422. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2424 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2428. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Additional Specialization Process at Start Lever Operation> Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the addition specialization process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2452, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2454, and the instruction number in step 2456. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to the winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts are surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the push order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of the replay-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received the forward push instruction command. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2468. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, from left to right. The image of the arrow pointing toward can suggest the push order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the reverse push instruction command in step 2470. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right->middle->left" as the push order navigation display in step 2472. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42, and the left stop button D4.
It is 1, and the push order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing from right to left.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group. Here, the avoidance command is a general term for both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the staging display device S40 in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right". Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-mentioned processes of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476, or when No in 2474, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2480. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing inside the BB advantageous when operating the start lever> Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the processing inside the BB advantageous when operating the start lever, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2702, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2704, and in step 2706, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to the winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the game. Condition The device determines whether it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts are surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the push order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of the re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received a command related to 7 replays. Judge whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display as the first number. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. It is displayed, and in step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed after shifting to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device S40. At, it is notified that the BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Process at the time of receiving the first body stop> Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first process at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 2500 of FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has an operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop in step 2504. Judge whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is forward-pressed navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays are a general term for forward-push black 7-match replays and reverse-push white 7-match replays. In step 2508, in the case of Yes, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (continues to be darkened in the game), and moves to the next process (process of step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays in step 2512, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Process at the time of receiving the second body stop> Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second process at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device according to the game is a push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the second stop in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, immediately. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Third Body Stop Production Related Determination Process> Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third body stop time effect related determination process called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG. 41.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the BB winning combination during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table and AT of the game. Based on the state and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, in the BB role that was won during AT (“AT in progress”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “recoverable / non-recoverable production state”). If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT-related state and the BB combination of the game, and next The process shifts to the process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the effect based on the effect executed in the game. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states related to AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are three types of BB start production: normal production, high-expectation production, and premier production. It should be noted that, depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB is configured to differ. → High expectation production → Premier production ”.

When the BB combination is a BB (type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal middle game, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. .. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. Is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 77/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the premier effect. The probability is 0/256.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming 157/256 is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the premier effect. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) or the BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), the premiere production Is not selected, and it is stipulated that there is a higher possibility that a normal effect will be selected than a high-expectation effect.

Even if it is an advantageous section, if you win the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference, the premier production will not be selected, and there is a possibility that the normal production will be selected rather than the high expectation production. It is set to be high.

If it is an "advantageous section" and the BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, the premier production may be selected. With this configuration, by selecting the premier production, it is confirmed that by winning the setting difference BB, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" after the setting difference BB ends. Can be shown to the player. In addition, when the BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference is won because it is an "advantageous section", there is a high possibility that a high expectation effect is selected rather than a normal effect. (It is less likely that a normal effect will be selected). By doing so, the player can infer whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the setting differenceless BB that won the prize in the "normal BB internal medium game" ( The distribution is the same as the distribution of the BB start effect according to the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-C). Not limited to this, the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won a prize in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the "normal BB internal medium game" The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) may be different, and by configuring in this way, the BB start related to the BB with setting difference It can be configured so that the distribution differs depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to a BB without a setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown on the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C). The state related to AT is one type of "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects, one that can be added and the other that cannot be added. The add-on possible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on non-addition effect is an effect that suggests that the AT addition lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. For the BB won during AT, there is no element of whether or not to win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT additional lottery is executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, even in the BB where there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed during the AT, the BB to be executed is the AT addition lottery due to the fact that the game medal can be obtained and the AT is in favor of the player after the BB ends. Is configured to clearly inform whether or not is executed. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described in detail.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 /. It is 256, and the effect that can be added is not executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect cannot be added is 256 /. It is 256, and the effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming is 0/256, and the non-addable effect is not executed.

<Process at the time of accepting the third body stop> Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third process at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is produced as a successful pressing order effect. "GET!" Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the "GET" of the pressing order success effect. ! ”Is not displayed.

If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. In step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S calculates the difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games added, and to display the number of AT games added.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an AT addition game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is added to the AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2616. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. Further, as a method of notifying the number of AT additional games, (1) all of the additional games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the additional games is notified by the game, and the remaining games are notified after the game. (3) The number of additional games is not notified in the game, and the games after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when the role that is not originally added), or a plurality of games are notified. After executing a game (continuous effect), the bet button D220 operation of the game in which the number of remaining games of the effect display device S40 is "0", or the next game of the game in which "0" is set, and the operation of the start lever D50. ) Can be notified.

In addition, when the common bell is won in the "addition specialization state", the number of AT addition games is not displayed even if the game is stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT addition lottery is performed in the common bell). do not have).

According to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the period advantageous for the player in the gaming machine configured to light the advantageous section indicator YH in the "advantageous section" by the above configuration. Can be appropriately notified. In addition, if the continuation effect is won by providing the "state for revival possibility effect" and then the revival effect (success) is executed, the state related to the AT of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in the "AT in progress state", and on the other hand, even if the revival effect (failure) is executed after the continuation effect is not won, the revival effect (failure) is executed. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be "recoverable or not staging state" and the state related to the AT as the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game that executes the revival effect, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival effect succeeds or fails. It is possible to secure a highly entertaining gaming machine in a gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player.

In this example, if the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the game can be changed to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to is not limited to that of this example, for example, if the AT lottery can be won by a rare role such as cherry (it can be won even if it is not the BB role) and the AT lottery is won. It may be configured to shift to the "AT precursor state" as the state related to AT, and to shift to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to check various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be used. As an example of the method of selecting and determining an item, operate the cross key SB2 (which has four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) to move the cursor to a desired item. By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected item (where the cursor is) is determined, and the screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Further, the menu screen may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. In other words, they may be different. Even if there are differences, they are all referred to as menu screens.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen> Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below. (1) Volume adjustment: The volume output from the gaming machine may be configured so that the player can adjust it. For example, after displaying the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment, the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to output. The volume may be increased, and the output volume may be decreased when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated. (2) Light intensity adjustment: The light intensity (luminance) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be configured so that the player can adjust the light intensity. For example, if the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment is displayed and then the upper button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes stronger (brighter), and if the lower button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes weaker. It may be configured to be (dark). (3) Character customization: Characters that appear during the game (hero character, push order navigation voice, battle character, character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) can be selected and changed. It may be configured, and after displaying the screen corresponding to the character customization, it is determined by moving the cursor to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2 and operating the sub input button SB. (4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be configured to be displayable on the screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table. (5) Dividend table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting a replay or a winning combination by displaying a stop) may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, for example, the payout table screen may be switched between the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (may be configured to be displayed over time) such as an operation of the sub input button SB is executed. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows. (1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display determination timing, payout completion timing based on winning, game end processing, a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side. From the timing, the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the command related to the end of the game, etc.), the game does not proceed (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on the stop display of the re-game, new start). The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed while the lever is not operated, the reel does not start rotating newly, etc. (until then, the sub input button SB is operated. But the menu screen is not displayed). The betting operation includes both the case of betting by operating the bet button D220 and the case of betting by inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 (automatic betting based on the stop display of replay). May be included in the betting operation). (2-1) It may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed during the execution of the game (the game medal is bet, the weight period until the reel rotation starts, and the reel is rotating). (2-2) It may be configured so that the menu screen can be displayed while the game is being executed (game medals are bet, etc.). (3) During the execution of a predetermined effect (during the execution of the effect of notifying whether or not the bonus has been won, during the execution of the continuous effect executed over multiple games, the effect of notifying whether or not the lottery has been won by adding the number of AT games. , Etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen can be displayed. (4) It may be configured so that the menu screen can not be displayed while the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is used when the menu screen can be displayed. It may be configured to blink.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB, but the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed or the operation of displaying the menu screen may be configured to have a plurality of operations. .. In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to the standby screen to be described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time for transitioning from the menu screen to the standby screen described later, and is an initial value at the timing when the menu screen is started to be displayed. Is set) to a predetermined time B (in this example, it is 300 seconds, which is longer than the predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing), and the next process (process in step 7200). Move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the staging display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and is a specific example to be satisfied. It may be configured as follows. (1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new reel rotation start. (2) In a situation where the menu screen is continuously displayed, it may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B in this example) has elapsed from the start of the display of the menu screen. (3) It may be configured to be satisfied by selecting and deciding a predetermined item on the menu screen and performing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item. For example, the cursor is placed on the volume adjustment item. By operating the sub input button SB, the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After adjusting the volume to the desired level by operating the cross key SB2, select by operating the sub input button SB again. The volume is set to the medium size, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes called a normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the menu screen is displayed. As an example, if the menu screen is displayed due to the operation of the sub input button SB in the situation where the screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, when the menu screen display ends, it will be displayed again. The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200).

If No in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 7122 whether or not the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200). do. Even if No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 7200). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). Seconds) are reset, in other words, the time until the standby screen is displayed is measured again from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers related to the display of the standby screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer related to the display of the standby screen is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as the timer related to the display of the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited for. It may be configured to be set in a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned on and off, the standby timer is set to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then the sub input button SB is operated under the condition that the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the menu screen is started to be displayed, the standby timer may be configured to set a predetermined time B (300 seconds).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed), and the effect is executed on the gaming machine. A moving image related to the story is repeatedly played, a display indicating "power saving" is displayed, and a logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the condition for displaying the menu screen described above requires the operation by the player, while the condition for displaying the standby screen does not require the operation by the player.

In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the standby timer described later is timing) is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. In the case of Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. The timer is started by setting a predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above). Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag and shifts to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processes of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached, but in addition to this, the sub-input button SB is operated on the menu screen. Therefore, it may be a condition that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is finished).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and shifts to step 7224. Even if No in step 7206, the process proceeds to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer timing flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110). Even if No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

Further, in the case of No in step 7204, in other words, when the standby timer timekeeping flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timekeeping end condition is satisfied. do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition in which the standby timer timing is terminated and the timer value of the standby timer is cleared to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the standby timer timing end condition is such that the rotation of the reel is newly started. If Yes in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212, while if No in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

If No in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 7240 whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen. In this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. The start, etc. are the conditions for ending the standby screen. It should be noted that the standby screen may be configured to be able to shift to the menu screen (display the menu screen). For example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the standby screen is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, in the situation where the screen where the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, when the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the hero is executed again by executing the bet operation. Will be displayed on the screen walking in the forest.

Next, FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed because the sub input button SB is operated while the menu screen can be displayed. After that, under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) elapses without the operation of the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels are stopped by performing the stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Since 3 minutes (a predetermined time A and 180 seconds) have elapsed from the release timing and the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time, the standby screen is displayed. As described above, in this example, a predetermined time B elapses after the menu screen is displayed, and a predetermined time A elapses after the game is finished (after the third stop button is turned on → off). It is configured so that the standby screen can be displayed in, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >> Here, the configuration related to the menu screen and standby screen applicable to the spinning machine according to this example, including the configuration of this embodiment, is included. It will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configurations listed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and there is no problem in appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations.

<Timekeeping start timing of standby timer> As the timing to start timing by setting the initial value in the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed, (1) the third stop button (rotates to the end) as the final stop operation. Timekeeping starts from the timing when the stop button corresponding to the reel is turned on and then turned off, (2) Timekeeping starts from the execution timing of the display judgment, (3) Timekeeping from the payout completion timing based on the prize. (4) The timing is started from the timing when the command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub control board S side as the game end process, and (5) the command related to the game end is received by the sub control board S side. It may be configured to start timing from the timing. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as the initial value.

<Timekeeping start timing of menu standby timer> Set the initial value in the menu standby timer to measure the time until the menu screen is displayed, and operate the sub input button SB to display the menu screen as the timing to start timing. It may be configured to start the timing from the timing. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A (timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) set in the standby timer described above.

<Structure related to sub-input button> In the situation where the menu standby timer is timing, the initial value may be reset to the menu standby timer. For example, the sub-input button SB or the sub-input button SB may be displayed while the menu screen is displayed. By operating the cross key SB2, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds), which is an initial value, may be set in the menu standby timer. As an example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, 300 seconds is set in the menu standby timer to start counting, and 100 seconds later, the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds, and the cross key SB2 is pressed. The menu standby timer may be configured to reset 300 seconds by the operation. In addition, the menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and the menu screen is being displayed (the screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after starting the menu screen display. The initial value may be reset to the menu standby timer by operating the cross key SB on the transition destination screen (the screen of the transition destination may also be the menu screen), or the menu screen is being displayed (menu). By operating the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB after starting to display the screen, the screen of the transition destination to which the screen has transitioned may also be the menu screen) by operating the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2. The menu standby timer may be configured so that the initial value can be reset.

<Structure related to stop button> In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then bet. Even if the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) is operated in a situation where the operation is not executed, the standby timer may be configured not to reset the initial value. As an example, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting. After that, when the bet operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if the stop button is operated, the timer value of the standby timer is not newly reset and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as it is.

<Structure related to bet operation> In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet is made. When the operation is executed (when the bet button D220 is operated to bet, or when the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and the bet is made), the time counting of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed. , If the other operations are not executed, the standby screen may not be displayed over time. In addition, in such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the passage of time from the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed from the bet operation. May be configured to be 0 or smaller. With this configuration, the number of remaining game medals is less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player finishes the game with less than the specified number of game medals remaining in the credit (no bet is made), the bet button is used when the clerk of the game hall cleans the game machine. Even if you operate and bet, the sound will not be output at an unintended volume.

<Display condition of standby screen> The standby screen is displayed on condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (standby timer, menu standby timer in this example) related to the display of the standby screen has changed from "1 to 0". You may. With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or some abnormality occurs in the timer measurement, the timer value reaches "0" without going through "1" like "20 → 0". Even if this is done (when zero is cleared), the standby screen will not be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended display of the standby screen (then, the timer value is reset and the value changes from 1 to 0). It may be configured to display the standby screen in the event of a timer). A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided so that the standby screen is displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to the settlement button> In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the credit is credited. When the settlement button is operated to execute the credit settlement in the situation where one or more exists, the predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the operation timing of the settlement button, or the timing when the credit settlement is completed. The standby screen may be displayed at (timing when the last game medal is returned to the discharge port D240).

<Configuration related to setting key switch> As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key is turned on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the switch is turned off to on. Also, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened when the power is turned on. The setting key switch may be turned from off to on, and then the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the front door is closed.

<Configuration when a predetermined error occurs> As the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then a predetermined error related to the main control board M side. (For example, an error that occurs when a game medal stays in the medal selector DS) occurs, and a standby screen is displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing at which the predetermined error is cleared. It may be configured as follows.

<Structure related to the front door> As the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) on and then off, and then the front door. May be configured to continue timing of the standby timer even when the open state is maintained. Also, as the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end), and then the front door is opened. After that, even if the front door is closed, the standby timer may be configured to continue timing.

<Structure 1 related to AT> In a situation where AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "normal gaming state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is used as the final stop operation. ) Is turned on and then turned off, and when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed, the standby screen can be displayed, while AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). In the situation, when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation. It may be configured not to display the standby screen. Similarly, even during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, or the ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even after a predetermined time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation. Also, in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), the third stop button (corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is supported as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the button is turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed, while AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). In this situation, as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation was not executed, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time. It may be configured so that the standby screen can be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Structure 2 related to AT> When the menu screen is displayed by operating a sub-input button or the like in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), (1) Predetermined time B (for example, "AT in progress"). , 300 seconds), the standby screen can be displayed. (2) After the predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed, the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) is restored. It may be configured to be.

<Structure 3 related to AT> In a situation where AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "normal gaming state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is used as the final stop operation. ) Is turned on and then turned off, and a standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed. During non-AT (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state". ), The menu screen is displayed, and the standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display, and the standby screen can be displayed during AT (for example, regarding AT). The menu screen is displayed in the situation where the state is "AT in progress"), and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (menu screen display) It may be configured to return to the previously displayed screen). That is, when the time values are compared, it may be configured so that "predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C". The time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other Configuration 1> The menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2). ) The screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (3) by operating the sub input button. It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, even if a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by inserting the game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is displayed, the menu screen continues to be displayed, while the sub. When a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen may be returned to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. Also, if you insert a game medal from the medal slot D170 and bet while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen is displayed, and if you operate the bet button while the standby screen is displayed and bet, it is displayed before the menu screen is displayed. The screen (normal screen displayed during the game when the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) may be displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is made, a menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is three. In the above situation, if you bet by operating the bet button (for example, the max bet button that allows you to bet 3 cards by one operation), the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the normal screen displayed during the game) is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the bet button is displayed when the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three. (For example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation) may be operated to display a menu screen.

<Other configurations 2> It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and a predetermined condition (for example, by inputting a password on the menu screen, the game history up to the previous time is taken over and the game is played is a predetermined condition. If the requirements are not satisfied, the moving image that introduces the story is displayed as the standby screen, but if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the moving image that introduces the character is displayed as the standby screen. It may be configured as follows. Further, in both the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen, but is the predetermined condition satisfied? Depending on whether or not, the frequency of displaying the story introduction or the character introduction may be different.

<Other changes> In this example, the first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning the prize and the second BB in which the second BB, which is less profitable for the player than the first BB by winning the prize, is executed. It may be configured to have a combination, and further, it may be configured so that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be elected in duplicate (providing a combination of "first BB + second BB"). With such a configuration, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the highly profitable execution of the 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, the first The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to the 2BB may be stopped and displayed (the winning of the second BB is carried over even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, by executing the highly profitable 1st BB first, for example, in the situation where the closing time of the amusement park is approaching, the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won. In that case, the low-profit second BB is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the high-profit first BB cannot be executed and the game must be terminated. Can be prevented.

Immediately after the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be notified, or the winning of the second BB may be notified (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification). If this is the case, the probability of winning the re-game may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Further, when it is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive villa chance time !!"). .. In such a configuration, if the second BB is not won even if the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definite that the effect generation = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable to configure the so as to execute the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as described above. For example, the staging display device S40 displays "BB consecutive villa chance time !!"). Further, even when only the first BB is won and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. Further, it may be configured to notify the winner of the first BB once after notifying the winner of the second BB (for example, the display of "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" → the display of "sorry" → the "first". 1BB is being won !! ”etc.). Further, when the second BB is hidden after the duplicate winning is won during the AT and the operation of the first BB is completed, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared (after the return, the effect is displayed). (Reducing the number of remaining games, etc.), but the internal reduction of the number of remaining games, etc. may be continuously suspended. If the first BB and the second BB are both elected in duplicate, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the staging display device S40 or the like.

In this example, (1) when the first BB and the small winning combination A are won in duplicate, the first BB is prioritized for stop control. (2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the small winning combination B is prioritized for stop control. That is, a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control over the BB combination and a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control of the BB combination may be provided. (3) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are won in duplicate, when the small winning combination A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination A (for example, at the time of the first stop, the first). 2 When stopped), the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (notification so that the small winning combination A can win) is performed. That is, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is to notify the first BB combination that is normally stopped and controlled in preference to the small winning combination A. Therefore, when the first BB combination cannot win a prize regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can win a prize), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. Further, when the small winning combination A wins as a result of the game, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change in the middle of the game, and the content notified by the effect display device S40 or the like and the actual content. It is possible to prevent the winning roles from being inconsistent. (4) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is performed during the rotation of all reels.

Further, it may be configured to have a display (7-segment or the like) that displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed, which is controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the stopped display symbol (or symbol combination). For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the valid line, an effect that is likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, making the lamp glow green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided and has the following features. (1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by using the sub input button of the gaming machine. (2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, it is output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine). ). (3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Further, during the AT state or the BB execution, the effect sound may be output from the game machine even when the game is played using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphone is removed, the volume for when using the earphone jack may not be cleared (default) immediately. For example, if there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (default value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, it is not necessary to clear (default) the volume for when using the earphone jack. The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted in the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever. ).

In this example, (1) after the end of the BB when the number of acquisitions is a specific number or more at the time of executing the BB, and after the end of the BB when the number of acquisitions is a specific number or less, the replay combination It may be configured so that the winning probability of is variable. (2) There may be a plurality of RT states that shift when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after the end of "RT1", or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state). (3) The RT state is changed when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state is not made to have a one-to-one correspondence with the winning, and the transition is made with a certain probability regardless of the conditional device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game). (4) Equipped with 0 RT transition eyes, duplicate winning of 0 cards, and duplicate winning of 0 cards. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter which position the stop operation is performed, a 0-card combination is provided, which is a combination in which one or more winning combinations are not won, and the RT state is changed by winning the 0-card winning combination. It may be configured to enable the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination and the 7-card combination or the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination A and the 0-card combination B. At the time of duplicate winning of the 0-card combination, either the 0-card combination that shifts to RT or the 0-card combination that does not shift to RT may be won depending on the pushing order. It is also possible to win the 0-card combination and the BB combination in duplicate, and give priority to the 0-card combination to win the prize.

As in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("left → middle → right", "left → right → middle", "middle → left → right", "middle → right → left", 6 choices of "right → left → middle" and "right → middle → left"), and the push order of the push order replay is configured to be 3 choices (1st stop is 3 choices of left, middle, and right). In that case, as the push order display in the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different, in other words, the push order navigation of 6 choices. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, as the push order display related to 6 choices, "= 1" in the case of "left → middle → right", "= 2" in the case of "left → right → middle", "middle → left →" "= 3" for "right", "= 4" for "middle → right → left", "= 5" for "right → left → middle", "right → middle → left" In the case of, it is displayed as "= 6", and as the push order display related to the three choices, "= 7" when the first stop is on the left and "= 8" when the first stop is in the middle. , When the first stop is on the right, it may be configured to be displayed as "= 9".

In this example, the configuration may be as follows. (1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", is configured to be displayable on the effect display device, and AT is configured. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from "AT in progress" to "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress", the previous AT While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), so that the "AT in progress state" is changed to the "normal game state" and then again within a specific game. If the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", the number of AT digestion games is not taken over from the previous number of AT digestion games, and the number of AT digestion games is newly counted from 0 games. (2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting the reel to be stopped by the effect display device S40 (for example, "reel" If you do not operate the stop button for a specified time after the reel starts rotating in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) effect The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed. (3) When the power is turned "on → off → on" in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, the rotation speed of the reel becomes a constant speed and before the operation of the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing of. (4) The state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT are different in the frequency of occurrence of push order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won, or the state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur. The frequency of push order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT, which is a state related to an AT in which push order navigation can occur. (5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example), which has the highest probability of winning a replay, the percentage of games in which push-order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push-order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the total winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting bored during AT. It may be configured as described above.

Here, the feature points of the above-mentioned game section will be described in detail below.

<< Normal section >> (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pushing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) The transition lottery to the "advantageous section" can be executed except during the internal winning of the BB and the execution of the BB.

<< Standby section >> (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pushing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) The transition lottery to the "advantageous section" is not executed. (5) After the BB wins in the "standby state", it will be an "advantageous section" from the next game.

<< Advantageous section >> (1) The push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pushing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) A lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, shifting from the "high probability state" to the "AT in progress state" as the state related to AT), a lottery for adding the number of AT games, and the like can be executed. (5) In the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit. (6) Counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section Y
When the counter value of Kc-1 becomes 0, the "advantageous section" is basically not terminated unless the BB or push order navigation is executed once or more in the "advantageous section". As an exception, when the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the "advantageous section" is said even if the BB and push order navigation are not executed even once in the "advantageous section". It is configured so that the "interval" can end. (7) Advantageous section The measurement of the remaining game counter YKc-1 is executed in all the games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the value of each game counter is added even during BB execution).

Here, the feature points related to the set lottery for the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below. (1) Whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery, and whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is not determined as the number of games progresses. (2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established. (3) When a certain condition device is satisfied and the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different. (4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the "high probability state" and the setting 6 shifts to the "AT in progress state". Etc., it does not differ depending on the set value). (5) Setting to "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, it will basically be "advantageous section" from the next game (setting to "advantageous section" by the BB role established in "normal section". If you win the lottery, you can set it as a "waiting section" in the next game).

Here, the feature points related to the change in the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below. (1) The lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" with reference to the set value is not executed (as a condition common to all set values, a predetermined number of games may have passed and a predetermined condition device may be established). .. (2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed. (3) When the BB is internally elected, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed. (4) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the executed BB differs depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed. (5) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the executed BB does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Can be executed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games can also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. Further, the following configurations may be applied independently, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >> (1) Although it is an "advantageous section", it is configured to have a "high probability state" as a state related to an AT that is more difficult to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state". (2) The continuous effect is composed of at least the number of consecutive games of a predetermined G number or more. (3) It has a normal role that does not win 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that wins 100% in the AT lottery. In this case, if a special role is won during the continuous production, an effect of notifying that the AT lottery has been won is executed even during the continuous production (the continuous production is replaced). (4) The more games remaining in the number of high-securing obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a high expectation (expectation of bonus winning, AT lottery winning), and the remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with low expectations. (5) Highly secured The smaller the number of remaining games in the obstacle game, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game completion production with a high expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning). (6) If the number of remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous production that is a loss is not executed, but the continuous production that is a hit (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) is Can be executed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the production of completing one game can be executed in both cases of loss and hit, but continuous production is a hit. Can only be executed if. (7) If the ceiling G number (1500 games) in the advantageous section is less than the predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed. (8) The selection tendency of the effect differs depending on whether the number of ceiling G in the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined value or more than the predetermined value (frequency of continuous effect, expected degree of jackpot of predetermined effect, etc.). (9) If a new transition is made to the "advantageous section" in the middle of the continuous production of loss in the "normal section" (for example, the production to be defeated), (9-1) the continuous production is rewritten (to the "advantageous section" transition game). Stage change production "When you turn around, there is a character and Stechen suggestion lines" etc.). The rate at which the effect is rewritten in the middle of the continuous effect (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (win). (9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the sub-control board S has moved to the "advantageous section" during the execution of the continuous effect, and the sub-game in the game when the continuous effect is not executed. The ratio of notifying that the shift has been made on the control board S side is different.

<< Point 2 >> (1) The stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section" is configured to be selectable by the player. For example, it can be selected by operating the sub input button. (2) The lottery result of whether or not it becomes 1: "advantageous section" of the stay stage A group is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game, and whether or not it becomes 2: "advantageous section" of the stay stage A group. The lottery result will be announced later at the end of the game (or at the time of the next game bet (when the start lever is operated when the replay stop is displayed)). (3) When the "normal section" is changed from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the stay stage A group, the stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group. When the stage changes from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the staging group A to the "normal section", the stay stage is maintained. (4) The AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage A group is off is different from the AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and other than the stay stage A group. For example, from the one with the lowest AT expectation, "advantageous section indicator is off and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator is on and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator is on and other than stay stage A group" (5) Percentage of stay stage transitions (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) triggered by the production (including 1G completion production and continuous production) in the game that changed from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section" And, the rate at which the transition of the stay stage occurs due to the production in the game from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section" is different.

<< Point 3 >> (1) The greater the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games), the higher the expectation (expectation that has won the AT lottery, and the bonus). The higher the probability of selecting a stay stage with a high degree of expectation, and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games of the number of highly secured obstacle games), the higher the degree of expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery). There is a high probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation of winning a bonus. (2) When the remaining guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" are less than or equal to a predetermined value (4 games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting the effect of shifting the stay stage. (3) If you are not staying at a stay stage with a high degree of expectation (expectation that you have won the AT lottery, expectation that you have won the bonus) and a production with a high degree of expectation is selected, the degree of expectation Expectation (winning AT lottery) than when a production with high expectation is selected in a situation where you are staying in a stay stage with high expectation (expectation of winning AT lottery, expectation of winning bonus) The degree of expectation that you are doing, the degree of expectation that you have won the bonus) is high.

<< Point 4 >> (1) If you win the BB in the "Resurrection possibility / rejection effect state", you may or may not execute the AT addition lottery during (1-1) BB. May be good. (1-2) After the end of BB, it may or may not shift to the "AT in progress state". (1-3) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed during the BB. (1-4) When the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" after the end of the BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "recoverable / non-resurrection production state". (2) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed in the "state for effect of resurrection". When the AT addition lottery is executed, (3) If you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 set replay in "Resurrection possibility production state", avoidance navigation will occur and the revival production (success) The number of additional games is notified at the timing after executing. (4) If a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the "recoverable / non-recoverable production state", the advantageous section indicator turns off at the start timing of the next game, while the "recoverable / non-recoverable production state". If a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the next game when the revival lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator may light up at the start timing of the next game. (5) In the case of a specification in which the AT addition lottery is not performed although it is an advantageous section in the "revival possibility production state", (5-1) the role of being able to execute the AT addition lottery in the "revival possibility production state" (5-1) For example, even if you win Watermelon A), the number of AT games will not be added, but if you win a role (for example, Watermelon A) that can be added in 1G (“AT in progress”) that executes the resurrection production (success), AT The number of games can be added. (6) Bonus when the bonus is won and the resurrection production (success) is executed in the resurrection production execution game when "Battle production 3G + resurrection production (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as the production at the end of AT. The number of AT games will not be added during the bonus, but the number of AT games will be added during the bonus when the bonus is won and the resurrection production (success) is executed in the battle production execution game (one of 3G). Can be. In addition, the staging tendency during the bonus may be different.

<< Point 5 >> (1) When the game state A and the game state B are held as the states related to the AT which is the "advantageous section", (1-1) the winning expectation of the AT addition lottery is "game state A> advantageous". It becomes "state B" (in game state A, the number of AT games is relatively easy to be added or the number of AT games is larger than in game state B). (1-2) The number of additional additions that can be added when the winning combination X is won in the game state A and the number of additional additions that can be added when the winning combination Y is won in the gaming state A are different. (1-3) The number of additions that can be added when the combination X is won in the game state B and the number of additions that can be added when the combination Y is won in the game state B are the same.

<< Point 6 >> (1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to the third stop. It is different from before (C). (1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of "A <B <C" from the one that is not conspicuous to the player. (2) When the AT is terminated from the "AT in progress state" and "RT1" state to the "low probability state" and "RT1", and the push order combination is won, the push order display device is used for pushing. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the staging display device (displayed as "???"). (3) If a prize 18 (falling combination) is won in the third stop in a game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. .. (4) When the start lever is operated in a situation where the power is restored and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is not completed, the initial process related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the voice from the speaker (for example, "Left!"). (5) Even in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as a "additional specialization state", if the fall combination is won, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is displayed with priority. (6) Even if the falling combination wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained. (7) When the falling combination is configured to be a pushing order combination (whether or not to display a stop is determined by the pushing order), a pushing order combination (pushing order bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and the pushing order is selected. When the navigation is executed and the navigation is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation, the display of the staging display device may be dimmed, while when the falling role is won, the navigation is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation. In that case, the display of the effect display device is not dimmed (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect is not dimmed).

<< Point 7 >> (1) When configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT preparation state" after the end of BB related to BB with setting difference (similar to change example 1 from this embodiment). (1-1) By winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3", the player wins the AT additional lottery (100% may be won or may be won with a predetermined probability). (1-2) The RT state to be transferred after the end of the BB is different depending on the type of the BB combination, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (the combination to execute the addition lottery, the addition) according to the combination that is likely to appear in any of the RT states. The lottery winning probability, the number of AT additional games) will be different. (1-3) Bonus A-> RT1-> Promotional Replay A-> RT3 (high replay probability), Bonus B-> RT2-> Promotional Replay B-> RT3. The winning rate or the average number of additional games is different. (1-4) If bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2, and have promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B is high for RT1 and RT2. It's different. (1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 are configured so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay differ between RT1 and RT2. (1-6) There is a setting difference After the BB ends, it shifts to the dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT preparation state”), and then shifts to the “additional specialization state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >> (1) It has 1st class BB-B1 and 1st class BB-B2, and after the 1st class BB-B1 is completed, it shifts to "RT3" and after the 1st class BB-B2 is completed. When configured to move to "RT4". (1-1) The execution mode of the AT additional lottery (the combination of executing the additional lottery, the additional lottery winning probability, the number of AT additional games) is different between "RT3" and "RT4". (1-2) The BB start effect related to the first type BB-B1 and the BB start effect related to the first type BB-B2 have different production tendencies (the selection rate of the highly expected BB start effect is different). (2) When the replay 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay 06 in the "AT ready state" and "RT3", the game shifts to "RT4" and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", the re-gaming role promoted to "RT3" is won. In addition, when "RT4" is changed to "RT3", even if the player wins the replay-E1 to E3 after that, the treasure box opening addition effect is not executed. (3) It has multiple types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and depending on the type of BB, after the BB is completed. The RT state of the above is different, and the execution mode of the AT addition lottery when the promotion re-game combination is won differs depending on the RT state. When configured in this way, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect performed during BB differs depending on the type of BB (gold treasure chest, silver treasure chest, copper treasure chest, etc.). The number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >> (1) The ratio of the BB start effect related to the BB with a setting difference won during AT and the start effect related to the BB without a setting difference won during AT and the non-AT The ratio of the BB start effect related to the winning setting difference BB and the start effect related to the BB without setting difference won during non-AT is different.

<< Point 10 >> (1) When the BB with no setting difference is won in the "normal section" rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the set value is selected when the BB with the setting difference is won in the "advantageous section". There is a higher probability that an effect that suggests a set value will be selected. (2) The BB won during non-AT selects a different BB start effect according to the setting difference, but the BB won during AT selects the same BB start effect regardless of the setting difference. (3) The ratio of the BB start effect to the same effect mode between the BB with the setting difference won during AT and the BB without the setting difference won during AT, and the setting difference between BB and non-AT won during non-AT. The ratio of the BB start effect to the same effect mode is different between the winning BB and the BB with no setting difference.

<< Point 11 >> (1) "Advantageous section indicator lighting" that can be executed at the time of winning "No setting difference combination (combination whose winning rate does not differ depending on the setting value) + BB" Rather than the probability of selecting "+ effect B", the probability of selecting "advantageous section indicator off + effect A" that can be executed at the time of winning "a combination with a setting difference (a combination whose winning rate differs depending on the set value)" Higher {"Rare role + BB time" is a production that encourages the transition to a high probability state (for example, a production that shifts to a stay stage where you can stay in a high probability state), but a production that fuels the winning of BB ( For example, battle production) is easier to execute}. (2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, it is configured to shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of high-securing obstacle games is "50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%". → 50G ”, and if 3G is selected, the battle will be defeated, and in other cases, the battle will be won. In addition, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of high-accuracy games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, an effect of inciting whether or not to continue is executed at the 20th Gth high accuracy (it is an effect of inciting whether the game is 20 games or 50 games, and if it succeeds, it is definite that the game is 50 games). ..

<< Point 12 >> (1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section", and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value. (1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed. (1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more likely to be executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section". (1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference. (1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference. (1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of loss.

<<< Configuration applicable to this example >> The configuration applicable to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, one configuration detailed below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. I will add that you may do it.

<< Configuration of Memory Map >> First, with reference to FIG. 59, one of the memory maps in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. The structure of the part will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) "setting value data": area for data related to the number that manages the setting stage, (2) "external signal system data": external signal output. Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM check sum data": Data used in the check sum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, and calculated from the data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off. An area for storing the stored data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, (4) "Control command buffer": Sub Area for storing command information to be sent to the control board side, (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when power is turned off and restored, and is stored in the current stack pointer when power is turned off. Area for storing existing data and storing information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off and on, (6) "Unused area": Area for storing areas not used for games, (7) "Saved data" 1 to save data 8 ”: Areas are used in the order of RAM in which the data to be saved may be written to the maximum in design by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, or the like. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, it is higher than "7FF8H". There is a possibility that the stack pointer will point to the address of. In that case, the saved data may be stored beyond the area of "backed data 1 to saved data 8" reserved as the area of the saved data in advance. In consideration of such a situation, the data that does not affect the progress of the game (the influence is small) to the address (the address close to "7FF8H") that the stack pointer may indicate when the unexpected problem occurs. It is preferable to configure it to store data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing the "set value data" at an address that is at least one address free from the "evacuated data 1 to the saved data 8" secured as the area of the data to be saved in advance, the game is played. It is possible to provide a game machine that does not give a disadvantage not only to the person but also to the game field. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used in the situation where the game is in progress after the power is turned off and restored, and (4) "control command buffer". Is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be sent to the sub-control board S side, and (3) "RAM check sum data" is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is turned off and restored. Since the data is not generated and (2) the "external signal system data" is the data to be transmitted to the hall computer, the data has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "set value data" is data related to the set value that affects the result of the game, so that, for example, if the set value is changed to a low set value, the player will be significantly disadvantaged. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the set value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur in the playground. As described above, (1) "set value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the figure, (1) "set value data" is the highest data (data stored in the higher address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "set value data" and (7) "save data 1 to save data 8" are (2) "external signal system data" and (3) "RAM check sum data". , (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "Unused area". With this configuration, even if a problem occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved in the RAM from the stack pointer exceeds the design, the RAM that is not used for the game is provided. Therefore, it is possible to configure the gaming machine so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. In addition, (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM check sum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses that store the five data is changed. For example, even if the upper addresses are stored in the order of "(3)-> (2)-> (4)-> (5)-> (6)". Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of "(6)-> (5)-> (3)-> (2)-> (4)" from the upper address. Further, (6) may be configured so as not to provide an "unused area". The data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above does not make it impossible to insert a game medal even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medal). There is no error that makes it impossible to input).

The area for storing the "set value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data. (A) Total score data: An area for storing data related to the number of game values that play the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed type rotating game machine that does not use actual game medals (total score data). When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, it may be configured to have 2 bytes as the area (1) in FIG. 59) (B) Minimum game time: 1 minimum game Data for counting time (counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (minimum game time is 4.1 seconds) (C) Number of acquired sheets counter when BB is activated: BB ends Counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) is satisfied (counter value is subtracted according to the value given to the player as the game value) (D) Counter for the number of acquired sheets when MB is operated : Counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending MB is satisfied (counter value is subtracted according to the value given to the player as the game value). A plurality of (A) to (D) and "set value data" may be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. Further, in the case of configuring so that a plurality of data can be stored, all of the plurality of data are stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (providing an area for storing). It is preferable to configure it so as to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the playing field. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (unexpected power failure, etc.) occurred. In some cases, the stack pointer may indicate an address higher than "7FF8H", but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the amusement park.

<< Action related to display of replay stop >> Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action in the winning game of the replay applicable to the revolving gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, the configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the stop display of the re-game is displayed.

First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp is set as an automatic bet operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed (when the re-game is stopped and displayed, a bet is made without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button). D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as the automatic betting operation related to the replay displayed as a stop. At about the same time, the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on (the turnable lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the characteristic points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1> The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are configured to light at substantially the same timing. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert the game medal, it is recognized that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the turnable lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by lighting the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 substantially at the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and the wrong game medal can be obtained. It is possible to prevent turning on and operation of the start lever D50.

<Structure 2> The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by winning the re-game has been performed, and it is possible to notify the player that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be promoted. Can be smooth.

<Structure 3> The re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game, and the timing is before the start lamp D180 is turned on. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then the start lamp D180 is turned on so that the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game winning. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 4> The re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game, and the timing is before the turn-on possible lamp D300 is turned on. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then, by turning on the insertable lamp D300, it is announced that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it possible to smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 5> The re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game, and the timing is before the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 6> The re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game, and the timing is before the two-bet lamp D212 is turned on. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 7> Regarding the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit after the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet). It does not light up at the same time as the lamp D213). With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by winning the re-game has been performed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 8> The timing of turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-game is stopped is substantially the same. If a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state. Therefore, by turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 almost at the same time, the player You will be able to quickly grasp the game status.

<Structure 9> The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 10> The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 11> The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<< Other Actions 1 >> Here, the actions different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the replay applicable to the spinning machine according to this example are described in detail below as the other actions 1. do.

<Structure 12> The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are configured to be always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. May be good. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by winning the re-game, and it is possible to notify that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be achieved. Can be smoothed.

<Structure 13> The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game status, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the lamp before.

<Structure 14> The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3-bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game state, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the inputtable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the lamp before.

<Structure 15> If a re-game is won in a certain game and the re-game is also won in the next game of the certain game, the re-game lamp D290 is based on the fact that the re-game related to the certain game is stopped and displayed. The re-game lamp D290 may be configured to continue to light until the end of the game one after another of the certain game after the light is turned on. In this way, by continuously lighting the re-game lamp D290, the player can be notified of the winning of the re-game as soon as possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 16> Third stop operation (
Alternatively, the re-game symbol stop display) is used as an opportunity to control various lamps such as the re-game lamp D290, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 1-bet lamp D211, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification by the lamp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Structure 17> The lighting timings of the replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to be substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the replay.

<Structure 18> Based on the display that the replay is stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet are turned off. The lamp D211 may be configured to light up at substantially the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals automatically bet when the player wins the re-game is three.

<Structure 19> Based on the display that the replay is stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet are turned off. The lamp D211, the replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to light at substantially the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet is 3 when the re-game is won, and it is clear that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the re-game. Can be notified to.

<< Other Actions 2 >> Here, further, using FIGS. 61 to 63, an action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the replay applicable to the spinning machine according to this example is performed. The other action 2 will be described in detail below.

<Action FIG. 2 when the re-game stop display is displayed> Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the action applicable to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At about the same time, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and at substantially the same timing, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (2) in the figure. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (4) in the figure, and then the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing of (5) in the figure, and the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 are turned on. Possible lamp D300 lights up almost at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 3 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

<Action Figure 4 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on almost at the same time. The turnable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

<Action Figure 5 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time.

<Action diagram 6 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up almost at the same time as the 2-bet lamp. The D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (4) in the figure. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 7 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290 is displayed. The start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 light up at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

<Action diagram 8 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are activated. And lights up almost at the same time.

<Action diagram 9 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (5) in the figure. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. After that, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 10 when the re-game stop is displayed> First, in the game that won the re-game (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the figure (1) shows. At the timing, the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing of (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing of (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are still lit.

Of the configurations exemplified in FIGS. 61 to 63, those having the same configuration as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19 can produce the same effect as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19.

It should be noted that, as described above, the stop display timing of the re-game symbol, the operation timing of the stop button, the on / off timing of the re-game lamp D290, the on / off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, the on / off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212, 1 It should be added that there is no problem in combining the lighting / extinguishing timing of the bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the turnable lamp D300.

In the above, a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is displayed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game medal cannot be inserted while the re-game stop display is displayed. It may be configured (applicable to all configurations described above). In such a configuration, the insertable lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is stopped and displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned substantially simultaneous is sufficient if it can be recognized that it is apparently simultaneous when the player visually recognizes it. For example, it may be a process (lighting / extinguishing timing) executed within a period in which the interrupt process is executed 10 times. For example, there is no problem even if they are almost simultaneous.

<< Configuration related to the bet button lamp >> The configuration related to the bet button lamp S50 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The process of enabling the bet button D220 from invalid by the process of the main control board M is executed, and then the main control board M sends a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control). The board M may be configured to send a command to the effect that the bet button D220 is enabled on the sub control board S side), and then the sub control board S is set to the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. The process for lighting the bet button lamp S50 may be executed by receiving the command for lighting the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 is controlled to be turned on and off on the sub control board S side, but the bet button D220 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on, and even if the player visually recognizes the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether the bet (bet button D220) is effective, the main control board M side It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation.

<< Configuration related to the stop button lamp >> The configuration related to the stop button lamp S60 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The process of disabling the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M is the sub control board. A command for lighting the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the process to be enabled is executed) is transmitted to the S side {the main control board M is the stop button on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to send a command indicating that D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is enabled}, and then the sub-control board S is the main control board. By receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M, the process for turning on the stop button lamp S60 may be executed. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 is controlled to be turned on and off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on, and the player visually recognizes the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 and the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not is effective, it can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<< Configuration for Reel Unit RU Applicable to This Example >> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, in the spinning machine according to this example, each of the reels M50 (M51, M52 and M53) is reeled. Rotatably prepared via the unit RU. Note that FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and an opening RU10 is formed. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. The details will be described later, but each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to the reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top RU 20 and a bottom RU 30 with an opening RU 10 interposed therebetween. By mounting the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through Hole RU40> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are arranged in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end portion of the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU. It is formed along. The three through holes RU40 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<< Pedestal BU >> The pedestal BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate-like shape. The end portion of the pedestal portion BU is attached to the left side surface, the right side surface, the back surface, etc. of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal portion BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal BU is attached to the back box so as to extend horizontally. As described above, the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal portion BU.

<Screw hole BU10> A plurality of, for example, three screw hole BU10s are formed in the front end portion of the pedestal portion BU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end portion. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

The number and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may be arranged in the horizontal direction corresponding to each other, and the reel unit RU may be stably mounted on the pedestal portion BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be configured to be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be configured by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. Both the RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) may be configured to be attached to the pedestal BU.

<< Method of fixing the reel unit RU >> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU has a corresponding pedestal portion BU. By positioning the reel unit RU so as to communicate with the screw hole BU10 and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 via the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU is positioned at a fixed position on the pedestal portion BU. Can be attached to and held in. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU.

In addition to the case where the reel unit RU is attached by a screwing member such as a screw or a bolt in addition to the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be detachably attached by using a detachable rivet, for example, a member such as a push rivet. It suffices if the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

<< Hopper H40 and Medal Auxiliary Tank HS >> FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view from the back right side of the hopper H40, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view from the back left side of the hopper H40. It should be noted that FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to rotate around each other, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. To. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medals inserted from the above-mentioned medal insertion slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 via the opening H30.

Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom portion H52, a right side inclined portion H54, and a left side inclined portion H56. The right-side inclined portion H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced on the right side of the hopper H40 is guided toward the hopper bottom portion H52, which will be described later, by its own weight. The left inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides the medal introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is arranged so as to cover above substantially the left half of the disk H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being connected in a row on the hopper bottom portion H52 so that they cannot fall, and the game medals can be smoothly guided toward the hopper bottom portion H52.

By providing the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any of the game medals introduced inside the hopper H40 via the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom portion H52. As described above, the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing the game medal inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged on the bottom H52 of the hopper. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is ejected from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotational operation of the disk H50. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be ejected one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide portion H62> A discharge guide portion H62 is formed inside the front side wall H42 along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64 formed in an inclined manner. When the hopper H40 is arranged in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located below the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but is formed so as to be slightly widened downward (from the left side to the right side).

The discharge guide unit H62 guides the game medal at the top of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores it in the hopper H40 before the game medal is stored in the hopper H40 and the game medal overflows from the hopper H40. It is a member to reduce the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medal guided by the inclined surface H64 is discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide unit H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging the game medal to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing the game medal inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide unit H62 holds the game medal. It functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

Further, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side to the right side. That is, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have an inclined downward to the right. The final target of the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

A protruding wall H58 projecting upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 is erected in the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. The protruding wall H58 can prevent the medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the bottom of the hopper H52.

<Medal Auxiliary Tank HS> The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially square columnar shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the upper portion, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Dropping of the screw BS of the reel unit RU >> A front door DU is attached to the revolving gaming machine so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the back box (the front door DU and the back box are combined into a housing). May be called). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (left side when viewed from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side when viewed from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact or collision with the back box is generated and propagates to the back box. Since the impact is generated on the right side of the revolving gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the revolving gaming machine is the largest, and the impact tends to be gradually weakened on the left side of the revolving gaming machine.

As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three points on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right side screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the right side receives the largest impact. Therefore, the right side screw BS screwed into the right side screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right side screw BS falls off and falls. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subject to an impact, and may loosen and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the left side is expected to have a small impact to some extent, but it is naturally possible that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the impact and the usage time.

<< Positions of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right side screw BS among the three screw BSs described above.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right side screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and by the weight of the right side screw BS, it rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right side screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right side screw BS is dropped due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS prevents the dropped screw BS from entering the hopper H40. It is possible to prevent the disk H50 from hindering the rotational operation or damaging the disk H50, and to operate the hopper H40 in a stable manner.

In the above-mentioned example, only the right side screw BS is targeted, but the hopper H40 is such that all three left side screw BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. And the reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, a screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU is prone to impact due to contact with the back box or collision. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side when viewed from the player) may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when it falls off.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >> FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screw BSs described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. In addition, in FIG. 67, the same configuration as in FIG. 64 is shown with the same reference numerals.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it freely falls downward (arrow 2A), remains as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and by the weight of the central screw BS, it rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

The hopper H40 is prevented from entering the hopper H40 by the dropped right side screw BS and the central screw BS, and prevents the dropped screw BS from hindering the rotational operation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50. It can be operated stably.

In the above-mentioned example, the right side screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted, but the left side screw BS also positions the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU so as to be located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. May be good. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 protruding upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen off and is placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the bottom of the hopper H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when it falls on the inclined surface H64. It is possible to prevent the screw BS from falling to the bottom H52 of the hopper and prevent the screw BS from interfering with the operation of the disk H50 or causing a failure.

In this way, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40 and assists the medal. By configuring it to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the amusement park can easily recover the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >> In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) to the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is stored. The dropped right side screw BS can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 by storing the dropped right side screw BS in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, the hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall surface H48 is extended to the right side (right side wall surface H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480, and when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and further passes through the bottom opening H410 to enter the medal auxiliary tank. It is stored in HS. In this way, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without invading the hopper H40.

<< Extension RU50 >> In the above-mentioned example, when the screw BS falls off, it freely falls toward the lower medal auxiliary tank HS as it is. On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, the extension portion EN may be provided at the lower part of the reel unit RU or the pedestal portion BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not fall immediately, but can be once guided by the extension portion EN and then dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension portion EN makes it possible to match the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS >> <Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode> As shown in FIG. 68, at least two full detection electrode through holes HS20 are formed on the inner surface of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Has been done. Further, at the lower part of the back surface of the back box, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided. The two full detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to project forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrode DBs pass through the corresponding fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 and project toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As the medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69 (c)) gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. Note that FIG. 69 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS (for example, an envelope line). (For convenience, the uppermost UL is illustrated with a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE conduct with each other through the plurality of medals, between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electrical circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the continuity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that the continuity is conducted between the two full detection electrodes DE. By doing so, when the game medals are stored up to the positions of the two full detection electrodes DE, the medal full error can be detected.

The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, in the case of providing three, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided one is provided. It can be configured so that a medal full error can be detected by conducting the fullness detection electrode and any one of the two fullness detection electrodes described above, and by making such a configuration, the medal assist Even when the game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored unevenly to the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), the medal full error can be detected.

<< Material of screw BS and material of medal >> The material of screw BS is magnetically conductive and conductive. For example, it is made of steel. Further, the material of the medal cannot be magnetized and is conductive. For example, it is made of brass plated or stainless steel. With this configuration, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE >> The left side screw BS, the center screw BS and the right side screw BS described above are for attaching the reel unit RU to the pedestal portion BU. Used for. FIG. 69B is a front view showing the entire screw BS. As this screw BS, one having a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69 (b)) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) is used (of the screw BS). Total length BL <distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right side screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE, so two screw BSs alone are used. It does not conduct with the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS does not get caught in the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Further, FIG. 69 (a) is a plan view of a back portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the fullness detection electrode DE protrudes inside the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<< Relationship between the length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the fullness detection electrode DE >> The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69 (b)) is the fullness detection electrode DE. It is shorter than the diameter ED (see FIG. 69 (a)) of (diameter length HR of the bearing surface of the screw BS <diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be caught by one of the full detection electrodes DE, and the screw will not be caught. Even when the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately detached, and the screw BS alone does not accidentally conduct.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), one of the two full detection electrodes DE, the full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the right side of FIG. 69 (c)) is already stored. When the medal is in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side of FIG. 69 (c)) and the screw BS temporarily come into contact with each other. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see the arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). , The conduction circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

As an example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that stores all three reels has been described, but even if it is a separate unit that stores each of the three reels separately, the screw BS It is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the reel, and the possibility that the screw BS will come off also arises. Therefore, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<< Configuration of Reel Band >> FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70B is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70 (d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and BB is started when "white seven, white seven, white seven" is stopped and displayed on the valid line. The reel band MO has a long plate-like shape (strip shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO is flexible and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the design can be illuminated from the back by the light emitted from the rotating cylinder backlight.

It has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so as to face each other and attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and so that their centers are located on the same axis of rotation. Further, the distance between the two frames is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer circumference of the two frames.

<Overlapping portion M58 and cut M59> The reel band MO is formed so that the length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion (superimposed portion M58) in which a part of the reel band MO overlaps is generated near the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55.

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end portion M57, and the cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55. When attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to attach the reel band MO, start attaching to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel frame MW to the reel. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of the M50, the reel band MO is attached from the second end M57 toward the first end M55 along the circumference of the reel frame MW, and finally, the first The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the end portion M57 of 2, and the pasting is completed up to the first end portion M55. When the reel band MO is attached in such an order, the first end portion M55 ends to be attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end is placed on the reel band MO. The parts M55 are overlapped with each other.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the reel band MO is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50 while the reel band MO is attached to the first end. Paste along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 toward the second end M57, and finally, paste the reel band MO on the upper side of the first end M55 and paste it to the second end M57. It's over. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the second end portion M57 ends to be pasted in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end portion is placed on the reel band MO. M57 is in an overlapping state.

Here, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the second end portion M57 is attached to the reel M50 in the same direction as the rotation direction, and the second end portion M57 is attached onto the reel band MO. In the case where the ends M57 of 2 are overlapped with each other, when the reel M50 rotates by executing the game, the air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). , Air easily enters between the second end M57 and the reel band MO on the lower side thereof, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the reel band MO is attached. In the case where the first end M55 is overlapped on the reel M55, the second end M57 is overlapped on the reel band MO described above when the reel M50 is rotated by executing the game. Compared with, it is difficult for air to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), and it is difficult for air to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel band MO near the first end M55 is in a state where it is difficult to peel off.

From the above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached to the reel M50 in the opposite direction to the rotation direction. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 is overlapped on the reel band MO after the pasting is completed in the direction.

<Various errors> As described above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, and the first end portion is formed. A cut M59 is formed by either the end of the M55 or the second end M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. In addition, when assembling the reel frame MW, it may be deformed and an error may occur. Further, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO can be attached in a state where the reel band MO is distorted or the like, or the size of the reel frame MW ( The outer circumference) may be installed in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large symbol (for example, "white seven") is configured to be located on the lower reel band MO of the superposed portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is desired due to these various errors. It is also assumed that the upper reel band MO of the superposed portion M58 overlaps with the large symbol when the position is deviated from the above position, and the large symbol is covered by the upper reel band MO.

In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and press the button depending on the game state, and when the bonus symbol is placed near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and press the button. , When the bonus symbol is stopped, the cut M59 may also be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When various errors as described above occur, it is assumed that not only the symbol but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbol are visually recognized by the player. If the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player will pay attention to the bonus symbol with joy because it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable for the player. If you visually recognize the deviation of the position of, there is a possibility that the joy of stopping and displaying the symbol combination that is the bonus symbol will decrease.

<In the case of a bonus symbol> In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at the position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (bonus symbol, etc.) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is longer than LL. A short design (longitudinal length SL) is placed closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the symbols having a short length in the longitudinal direction at the positions closest to the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and it is possible to prevent the symbol from being covered by the reel band MO. Further, even when the above-mentioned various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59, the deviation of the position of the symbol, and the like. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the cherry symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry) are shown. Although it is shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol are different. There is no problem. Further, the symbols arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be bonus symbols. For example, a replay symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the replay). Or watermelon symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59. Further, in this example, the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the longitudinal length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the lateral direction may be longer than the length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59 in the lateral direction.

In the above-mentioned example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (bonus symbol, etc.) is LL, and the length in the longitudinal direction is SL, which is shorter than LL. The arrangement of the symbols was decided by comparison, but the length in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT, and the length in the lateral direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol most protruding upward and the portion of the symbol most protruding downward along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the length LT and ST in the lateral direction are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol most protruding upward and the portion of the symbol most protruding downward along the lateral direction.

<In the case of small role symbols> Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols that do not stop and display on the effective line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if they are won, in other words, the maximum number of slip frames or more. Designs that have at least one location that is separated from each other (sometimes referred to as a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) are also targets for the game. It is a design that a person tries to see. In addition, in a game in which a rare role is won, the winning of the rare role may not be notified before the stop button is operated, and even in such a case, the player wants to win the rare role, so it is the rarest. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is easy to acquire a role (which is most profitable for the player). In addition, there are some gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations, such as one that is paid out less than one when a prize is won, and in such a case, the operation timing (operation) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player. The stop button is often operated in the mode). It should be noted that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player, may be referred to as an optimum game method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimum game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are the left reel upper stage, the middle reel upper stage, the right reel upper stage (upper stage straight line), the left reel middle stage, the middle reel middle stage, and the right reel middle stage (middle stage straight line). Left reel lower, middle reel lower, right reel lower (lower straight), left reel upper, middle reel middle, right reel lower (right down straight), left reel lower, middle reel middle, right reel upper (right up straight) ) And 5 lines, and the specified number is 3 sheets. In addition, it has a watermelon role and a cherry role as rare roles, and when the watermelon role wins, "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops and displays in a straight line on the effective line, and the cherry role wins. Is configured to stop and display "cherry, any, any" (any symbol indicates that any symbol may be used) on the effective line. Further, since the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are both rare roles, the symbol has at least one location separated by the maximum number of slip frames or more.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Is located in. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and it is easy to win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing with the above-mentioned optimum game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, it stops between three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row. By operating the button, you can win a prize regardless of whether you win the role of watermelon or the role of cherry. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), the range of 9 frames from the upper row of the cherry symbol to the lower row of the watermelon symbol is the range that can be stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure. As described above, even when any range of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. (There is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames below the cherry), and the deviation of the cut M59. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the position of the pattern or the pattern.

As shown in the figure, a symbol that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare combination is easy to win is displayed in the vicinity of the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 can be configured not to be positioned at the position where the stop is frequently displayed on the reel, and the deviation of the cut M59 and the position of the symbol can be configured. Even when the reels are misaligned, it can be configured so that the misalignment of the cut M59 and the misalignment of the symbol position are less likely to be visually recognized by the player.

In this example, the number of steps for one lap of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16 remainder 16, there is one 17-step frame (design) and 4 16-step frames (design) as the distribution of 20 frames (designs). The reel is configured. Further, since it is preferable that the cut M59 is configured so as not to be visually recognized by the player as much as possible, the frame (design) adjacent to the cut M59 should have 16 steps with a relatively small number of steps. Is preferable.

As the configuration of the spinning machine in this example, it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medals used in the general spinning machine, and a pseudo game medium converted into data is used. It may be configured to enable the progress of the game. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the rotating drum type game machine can be improved by the amount that it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medal (for example, the opening for inserting the game medal). It does not have a payout opening, the front door and the back box are integrated, etc., which closes the gap where foreign matter is inserted), reduces the risk of illegal game medals being used, etc. It can be configured to improve the security against fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts) such as (sometimes referred to as an enclosed rotating drum type gaming machine). It should be added that the configuration of the enclosed type revolving gaming machine can be applied to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). It may be configured not to have the credit and the credit number display device D200. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are combined as one total score, and the main control board M and the payout control are used. The total score may be increased / decreased or displayed on the substrate H (which may also be referred to as a game value control board or a game value control means) or another substrate.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantive game medal used in a general rotating body type gaming machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed type rotating body type gaming machine. It may be configured. In addition, "score" may be referred to as "score information", "points", "point information", "game value", and "game value information". Physically existing and substantive game medals can be directly picked up and handled by the player. On the other hand, in the enclosed type revolving gaming machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling the actual game medal. The score is not a real game medal, but a pseudo game medium that is digitized so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. Further, the "credit" is a score for temporarily storing the score in a bet-able state or a settlement-capable state, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" is all the scores that can be input to the enclosed type rotating gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general rotating machine that uses a substantive game medal. When the configuration of the enclosed type rotating gaming machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a "game medal" in the present specification is referred to as "score", "score information", and "score information". There is no problem in treating it as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc., and "score", "score information", "points", "point information" as appropriate. , There is no problem in calling it as "game value" or "game value information". It is not necessary to have "credit". Further, it is no problem to replace the credit number display device with the total score display device.

In the above, the configuration of a rotating cylinder type gaming machine has been illustrated as a gaming machine, but the above configuration is applicable to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines, rock-paper-scissors gaming machines, arrange balls, game machines, and casino machines. can.

(Summary) Based on the configuration shown in the above examples, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The gaming machine according to the present aspect (1) has a band-shaped reel tape (for example, a reel band MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (for example, a reel frame MW), and the reel tape includes the reel tape. A plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the reels, and the symbols include at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol). The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol, and the second symbol is arranged at at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. Moreover, the first symbol is not arranged at each of both ends of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction, and the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is the surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound. It is a game machine characterized by being longer than the outer circumference.

The gaming machine according to the present aspect (2) includes a gaming machine main body, a front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine main body, and a reel unit (for example, a reel) inside the gaming machine main body. In a rotating body type gaming machine provided with a unit RU), a pedestal portion (for example, a pedestal portion BU) on which the reel unit is installed and a gaming medium installed below the pedestal portion are installed inside the gaming machine main body. (For example, hopper H40) and an auxiliary tank member (for example, medal auxiliary) for retracting a surplus gaming medium installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and stored in the main tank member. A tank HS) is provided, and a part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member, and is provided with the reel unit. The pedestal portion is detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS), and the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component located at a position closest to the side where the front door opens and closes. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present aspect (3) includes a gaming machine main body, a front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine main body, and a reel unit (for example, a reel) inside the gaming machine main body. In a rotating body type gaming machine provided with a unit RU), a pedestal portion (for example, a pedestal portion BU) on which the reel unit is installed and a gaming medium installed below the pedestal portion are installed inside the gaming machine main body. A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) in which the slingshot is stored and an auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal assist) for retracting a surplus gaming medium installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and stored in the main tank member. A tank HS) is provided, and the reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS), and the locking component located closest to the side where the front door opens and closes. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the door.

The gaming machine according to the present aspect (4) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reel M50), a plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40), and an effect display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect. ) And an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect, and after rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the stop The final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel that stops the rotation of the reel in response to the operation of the switch and finally stops the rotation of the plurality of reels, is performed. One game can be completed by stopping all of the plurality of reels, and when the final stop switch operation is performed, the bet is not made from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. When the first predetermined time elapses, a specific image (for example, a standby screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit, and a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is configured after one game is completed. ) Is operated, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when the predetermined operating member is operated to display the predetermined image, the predetermined image is displayed. When the second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from the specific timing after the operation member is operated, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to the present aspect (5) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reel M50), a plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40), and an effect display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect. ) And an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect, and after rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the stop The final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel that stops the rotation of the reel in response to the operation of the switch and finally stops the rotation of the plurality of reels, is performed. One game can be completed by stopping all of the plurality of reels, and when the final stop switch operation is performed, no bet is made from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. When the first predetermined time elapses, a specific image (for example, a standby screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit, and a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is configured after one game is completed. ) Is operated, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when the predetermined operating member is operated to display the predetermined image, the predetermined image is displayed. When the second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from the specific timing after the operation member is operated, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image. The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the predetermined time, and when the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, after the predetermined operating member is operated. When a specific operating member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from the specific timing of the above, the predetermined operating member is activated. Even if the second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from the specific timing after the operation, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit, while the final stop switch operation is performed. If this is done, the stop switch is newly operated before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. However, after the final stop switch operation was performed When the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when the final stop switch operation is performed, the final stop switch operation is performed. If a bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the stop switch operation is performed, the predetermined time after the final stop switch operation is performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even after the first predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of.

P-turning type game machine, DU front door (door) D door board, D10s input reception sensor D20s first input sensor, D30s second input sensor D40 stop button, D41 left stop button D42 middle stop button, D43 right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 checkout button D70 display panel, D80 door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 can be flipped Lamp D200 Credit number display device, D210 Insertion number display light D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push order display device) D280 AT counter value display device M Main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game interval minimum timer S sub control board, S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 counter-counter backlight S40 effect display device, SC sub-control chip E power supply board, E10 power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disc, H50a disc rotation axis H60 game medal exit , H70 Discharge urging means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K cylinder board, K10 cylinder motor K20 cylinder sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button KHc high securing obstacle counter, YKc-1 Advantageous section remaining Game counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU reel unit, BU pedestal, H62 discharge guide, H64 inclined surface HS medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE full detection electrode M55 1st end, M57 2nd end, M58 Overlapping part, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

A gaming machine housing with an open front and
A front door that is connected to the left side of the gaming machine housing via a hinge mechanism and can be opened and closed,
1 bet lamp and
With a 2-bet lamp
With a 3-bet lamp,
With the replay lamp,
With the start lamp
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
A blocker that can take an on state that allows acceptance of game media and an off state that does not allow acceptance of game media,
Internal lottery means and
Equipped with reel control means,
It is configured so that power-off processing can be executed after a power-off occurs.
The reel control means is configured to be able to execute an acceleration process for accelerating a specific reel over a predetermined period of time.
If the power supply cutoff process is executed during the predetermined period during which the acceleration process is being executed and then the power is restored, the acceleration process for accelerating the specific reel during the remaining period of the predetermined period is performed. It is configured to be run from the continuation and
Inside the gaming machine housing,
The reel unit including the plurality of reels and
The main tank member that stores the game medium and
An auxiliary tank member for storing the game medium overflowing from the main tank member is provided.
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member.
The reel unit has a plurality of screw holes and has a plurality of screw holes.
A conductive locking component is inserted into at least two or more of the plurality of screw holes.
Among the locking parts inserted through the plurality of screw holes, the auxiliary tank member is arranged vertically below the predetermined locking part on the rightmost side in the front view of the gaming machine housing.
Among the locking parts inserted through the plurality of screw holes, the slope portion is arranged vertically below a specific locking part different from the predetermined locking part.
In a state where the auxiliary tank member is installed inside the gaming machine housing, the first member and the second member for detecting whether or not the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full are provided. At least, the distance between the first member and the second member is configured to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the predetermined locking component.
The first member and the second member for detecting whether or not the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full in a state where the auxiliary tank member is installed inside the gaming machine housing. The distance between the first member and the second member is set to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the specific locking component.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on the acceptance of a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped due to the reception of a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has the predetermined symbol. After the symbols corresponding to the combination are stopped, the stop operation is accepted at the first timing for the predetermined reel corresponding to the subsequent final stop operation of the player, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped. , The number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be given to the player.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined reels are stopped due to the reception of a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. The plurality of reels are stopped even though the symbols corresponding to the symbol combinations are stopped, and the stop operation is accepted for the predetermined reel at the first timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. It is configured so that a player can be provided with a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination even under a predetermined situation in which the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped when the reel is stopped .
In the next game of the predetermined game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, 3 is set as the number of bets and acceptance of the game medium is permitted. In the situation where the specific game executed by the operation of the start switch is in the predetermined game state, the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, and the plurality of reels are rotating. , The replay lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp is on, the 2-bet lamp is on, the 3-bet lamp is on, the start lamp is off, and then. At the second timing after the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped, the replay lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp is on, and the 2-bet lamp is on. The 3-bet lamp is on, the start lamp is off, and then the start lamp is on at the fourth timing after the replay lamp is turned on at the third timing. The replay lamp is lit,
In the specific game, at the third timing after the specific symbol combination is stopped, the replay lamp is turned on, and in the game executed thereafter (the next game of the specific game), the inside is said. The replay lamp is lit at the second timing after the specific result is determined by the lottery means and then the specific symbol combination is stopped, and then at the fourth timing, the replay lamp is lit. The replay lamp is lit and
At least from the third timing after the specific symbol combination in the specific game is stopped to the fourth timing after the specific symbol combination is stopped in the next game of the specific game. , The replay lamp is lit without turning off,
The blocker is in the off state at the second timing in the specific game, and the blocker is in the on state at the fourth timing.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images